physics standard level paper 1 - smiletutor · 2020-03-18 · physics standard level paper 1...

N15/4/PHYSI/SPM/ENG/TZ0/XX

PhysicsStandard levelPaper 1

Instructions to candidates

• Do not open this examination paper until instructed to do so.• Answer all the questions.• For each question, choose the answer you consider to be the best and indicate your choice on

the answer sheet provided.• A clean copy of the physics data booklet is required for this paper.• The maximum mark for this examination paper is [30 marks].

45 minutes

13 pages © International Baccalaureate Organization 2015

Monday 9 November 2015 (morning)

8815 – 6504

– 2 – N15/4/PHYSI/SPM/ENG/TZ0/XX

1. Which of the following is a derived unit?

A. Mole

B. Kelvin

C. Coulomb

D. Ampere

2. One kilogram of ice of density 1000 kg m–3 is frozen in the shape of a cube. The diameter of a water molecule is 10–10 m. What is the difference in the orders of magnitude of the length of one side of the ice cube and the diameter of a water molecule?

A. 7

B. 9

C. 11

D. 13

3. An object is at rest at time t = 0. The variation with t of the acceleration a of the object is shown from t = 0 to t = 20 s.

a / m s– 2

6

5

4

3

2

1

0 0 5 10 15 20

t / s

What is the speed of the object when t = 15 s?

A. 25 m s– 1

B. 50 m s– 1

C. 75 m s– 1

D. 100 m s– 1

– 3 –

Turn over


4. Which of the following is proportional to the net external force acting on a body?

A. Speed

B. Velocity

C. Rate of change of speed

D. Rate of change of velocity

5. A small positively charged sphere is suspended from a thread and placed close to a negatively charged rod. When the thread is at 45° to the vertical the system is in equilibrium. The weight of the sphere is W and the magnitude of the electrostatic force between the rod and the sphere is F.

45°

Fsphere

W rod

(not to scale)

What is the magnitude of W compared with the magnitude of F ?

A. W F= 2

B. F W F< < 2

C. W = F

D. W > F

6. An object of mass m is initially at rest. When an impulse I acts on the object its final kinetic energy is EK. What is the final kinetic energy when an impulse of 2I acts on an object of mass 2m initially at rest?

A. EK

2

B. EK

C. 2EK

D. 4EK


7. A heat engine does 300 J of work during one cycle. In this cycle 900 J of energy is wasted. What is the efficiency of the engine?

A. 0.25

B. 0.33

C. 0.50

D. 0.75

8. A container holds 40 g of argon-40 1840 Ar( ) and 8 g of helium-4 2

4He( ).

What is the number of atoms of argonnumber of atoms of helium

in the container?

A. 12

B. 29

C. 21

D. 92

9. The thermal capacity of a body is the energy required to change the temperature of the body by

A. 1 K.

B. 1 K m3.

C. 1 K kg–1.

D. 1 K s–1.

– 5 –

Turn over


10. When 1800 J of energy is supplied to a mass m of liquid in a container, the temperature of the liquid and the container changes by 10 K. When the mass of the liquid is doubled to 2m, 3000 J of energy is required to change the temperature of the liquid and container by 10 K. What is the specific heat capacity of the liquid in J kg–1 K–1 ?

A. 60m

B. 120m

C. 180m

D. 240m

11. Two objects are in thermal contact and are at different temperatures. What is/are determined by the temperatures of the two objects?

I. The direction of thermal energy transfer between the objects II. The quantity of internal energy stored by each object III. The process by which energy is transferred between the objects

A. I only

B. II only

C. I and II only

D. I, II and III

12. The period of a particle undergoing simple harmonic motion (SHM) is T.

The ratio acceleration of the particledisplacement of the particle frrom its equilibrium position

is proportional to

A. T –2.

B. T –1.

C. T .

D. T 2.


13. A particle of mass m oscillates with simple harmonic motion (SHM) of angular frequency ω. The amplitude of the SHM is A. What is the kinetic energy of the particle when it is half way between the equilibrium position and one extreme of the motion?

A. mA2 2

4ω

B. 38

2 2mA ω

C. 932

2 2mA ω

D. 1532

2 2mA ω

14. A transverse travelling wave has an amplitude x0 and wavelength λ. What is the minimum distance between a crest and a trough measured in the direction of energy propagation?

A. 2x0

B. x0

C. λ

D. λ2

– 7 –

Turn over


15. A wave on a string travels to the right as shown. The frequency of the wave is f. At time t = 0, a small marker on the string is in the position shown.

What is the position of the marker at t = 14 f

?

A.

marker

D.

B. C.

16. Electromagnetic waves

A. always obey an inverse square law.

B. are made up of electric and magnetic fields of constant amplitude.

C. always travel at the same speed in a vacuum.

D. are always polarized.


17. A wave pulse travels along a light string which is attached to a frictionless ring. The ring can move freely up and down a vertical rod.

string

rod

ring

What is the shape of the wave pulse after reflection?

A.

B.

C.

D.

– 9 –

Turn over


18. Resistors of resistance R, R and 3R are connected to a cell of negligible internal resistance. The diagram shows three currents Ix, Iy and Iz in the resistors.

Iz

3R

Iy

R Ix

R

Which is a correct relationship between the currents?

A. Ix = Iy

B. Iy = 3Iz

C. Iz = 3Ix

D. Ix = Iy + 3Iz

19. A cylindrical resistor of length l is made from a metal of mass m. It has a resistance R.

Two resistors, each of length 2l and mass m2

, are then created from the same volume of the metal.

What is the resistance of the two resistors when connected in parallel?

A. R

B. 2R

C. 4R

D. 8R


20. Three resistors of resistance R are connected in parallel across a cell of electromotive force (emf) V that has a negligible internal resistance. What is the rate at which the cell supplies energy?

A. VR

2

3

B. VR

2

9

C. 9 2VR

D. 3 2VR

21. What is the correct definition of gravitational field strength?

A. The mass per unit weight

B. The weight of a small test mass

C. The force acting on a small test mass

D. The force per unit mass acting on a small test mass

22. A +3 C charge and a − 4 C charge are a distance x apart. P is a distance x from the +3 C charge on the straight line joining the charges.

x x

P +3 C − 4 C

What is the magnitude of the electric field strength at P?

A. 20

1επ x

B. 20

12 επ x

C. 20

14 επ x

D. 20

17 επ x

– 11 –

Turn over


23. An electron is moving parallel to a straight current-carrying wire. The direction of conventional current in the wire and the direction of motion of the electron are the same. In which direction is the magnetic force on the electron?

wireelectron

24. A simple model of the hydrogen atom suggests that the electron orbits the proton. What is the force that keeps the electron in orbit?

A. Electrostatic

B. Gravitational

C. Strong nuclear

D. Centripetal

25. Bismuth-210 83210Bi( ) is a radioactive isotope that decays as follows.

83210Bi X Yβ α−

→ →

What are the mass number and proton number of Y?

Mass number Proton number

A. 206 86

B. 206 82

C. 210 82

D. 214 83


26. For fissile material, fuel enrichment is the

A. increase in the ratio of uranium-235uranium-238

.

B. conversion of uranium-235 to uranium-238.

C. conversion of uranium-238 to plutonium-239.

D. increase in the ratio of uranium-238uranium-235

.

27. It is suggested that the solar power incident at a point on the Earth’s surface depends on

I. daily variations in the Sun’s power output II. the location of the point III. the cloud cover at the point.

Which suggestion(s) is/are correct?

A. III only

B. I and II only

C. II and III only

D. I, II and III

28. Waves are incident on an oscillating water column (OWC) ocean-wave energy converter with an available power P. What is the available power for this converter when the wave amplitude is halved and the wave speed is doubled?

A. P4

B. P2

C. P

D. 4P


29. The average surface temperature of Mars is about 200 K. The average surface temperature of Earth is about 300 K. Both can be regarded as black bodies.

What is the ratio energy radiated per second per unit area on Marsenergy radiiated per second per unit area on Earth ?

A. 0.7

B. 0.4

C. 0.3

D. 0.2

30. In an energy-balance climate model, the power of the incoming radiation over an area A is Pi and the power of the outgoing radiation over the same area is Po . The surface heat capacity is Cs. What is the time taken to increase the temperature of the area by θ ?

A. ( )P P

Ci o

s

−θ

B. C

P Ps

i o

θ( )−

C. ACP P

s

i o

θ( )−

D. A P P

C( )i o

s

−θ

N15/4/PHYSI/SPM/ENG/TZ0/XX/M

2 pages

Markscheme

November 2015

Physics

Standard level

Paper 1

– 2 – N15/4/PHYSI/SPM/ENG/TZ0/XX/M

1. C 16. C 31. – 46. – 2. B 17. C 32. – 47. – 3. B 18. B 33. – 48. – 4. D 19. C 34. – 49. – 5. C 20. D 35. – 50. – 6. C 21. D 36. – 51. – 7. A 22. B 37. – 52. – 8. A 23. D 38. – 53. – 9. A 24. A 39. – 54. – 10. B 25. B 40. – 55. – 11. C 26. A 41. – 56. – 12. A 27. D 42. – 57. – 13. B 28. B 43. – 58. – 14. D 29. D 44. – 59. – 15. A 30. C 45. – 60. –

1 hour 15 minutes

N15/4/PHYSI/SP2/ENG/TZ0/XX



• Write your session number in the boxes above.• Do not open this examination paper until instructed to do so.• Section A: answer all questions.• Section B: answer one question.• Write your answers in the boxes provided.• A calculator is required for this paper.• A clean copy of the physics data booklet is required for this paper.• The maximum mark for this examination paper is [50 marks].


Monday 9 November 2015 (morning)Candidate session number

8815 – 6505

20EP01

– 2 – N15/4/PHYSI/SP2/ENG/TZ0/XX

Section A

Answer all questions. Write your answers in the boxes provided.

1. Data analysis question.

An experiment is undertaken to investigate the relationship between the temperature of a ball and the height of its first bounce.

A ball is placed in a beaker of water until the ball and the water are at the same temperature. The ball is released from a height of 1.00 m above a bench. The maximum vertical height h from the bottom of the ball above the bench is measured for the first bounce. This procedure is repeated twice and an average hmean is calculated from the three measurements.

1.00 m

point of release of the ball

maximum vertical position of the ball

h

bench

The procedure is repeated for a range of temperatures. The graph shows the variation of hmean with temperature T.

hmean / m

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

8

7

6

8 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

T / °C

(a) Draw the line of best-fit for the data. [1]

(This question continues on the following page)

20EP02

– 3 –

Turn over


(Question 1 continued)

(b) State why the line of best-fit suggests that hmean is not proportional to T. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) (i) State the uncertainty in each value of T. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) The temperature is measured using a liquid in glass thermometer. State what physical characteristic of the thermometer suggests that the change in the liquid’s length is proportional to the change in temperature. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(d) Another hypothesis is that hmean = KT 3 where K is a constant. Using the graph on page 2, calculate the absolute uncertainty in K corresponding to T = 50 °C. [4]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20EP03


Please do not write on this page.

Answers written on this pagewill not be marked.

20EP04

– 5 –

Turn over


2. This question is about gravitation and uniform circular motion.

Phobos, a moon of Mars, has an orbital period of 7.7 hours and an orbital radius of 9.4 ×103 km.

(a) Outline why Phobos moves with uniform circular motion. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Show that the orbital speed of Phobos is about 2 km s–1. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) Deduce the mass of Mars. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20EP05


3. This question is about simple harmonic motion (SHM).

The graph shows the variation with time t of the acceleration a of an object X undergoing simple harmonic motion (SHM).

a / m s–2 3

2

1

0

– 1

– 2

– 3

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 t / s

(a) Define simple harmonic motion (SHM). [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) X has a mass of 0.28 kg. Calculate the maximum force acting on X. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


20EP06

– 7 –

Turn over



(c) Determine the maximum displacement of X. Give your answer to an appropriate number of significant figures. [4]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(d) A second object Y oscillates with the same frequency as X but with a phase difference

of 4π

. Sketch, using the graph opposite, how the acceleration of object Y varies with t. [2]

20EP07


Section B

This section consists of three questions: 4, 5 and 6. Answer one question. Write your answers in the boxes provided.

4. This question is in two parts. Part 1 is about the nuclear model of the atom and radioactive decay. Part 2 is about waves.

Part 1 Nuclear model of the atom and radioactive decay

(a) Outline how the evidence supplied by the Geiger–Marsden experiment supports the nuclear model of the atom. [4]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Outline why classical physics does not permit a model of an electron orbiting the nucleus. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


20EP08

– 9 –

Turn over


(Question 4, part 1 continued)

(c) The nuclide radium-226 88226Ra( ) decays into an isotope of radon (Rn) by the

emission of an alpha particle and a gamma-ray photon.

(i) State what is meant by the terms nuclide and isotope. [2]

Nuclide: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Isotope: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Construct the nuclear equation for the decay of radium-226. [3]

88226Ra Rn He..........

..............................

....→ + + .......

.......... γ

(iii) Radium-226 has a half-life of 1600 years. Determine the time, in years, it takes

for the activity of radium-226 to fall to 164

of its original activity. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


20EP09



Part 2 Waves

Two waves, A and B, are travelling in opposite directions in a tank of water. The graph shows the variation of displacement of the water surface with distance along the wave at a particular instant.

displacement / 10–3 m

20

15

10

5

0

– 5

– 10

– 15

– 20

10

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

wave A

wave B

distance / 10–2 m

(d) State the amplitude of wave A. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


20EP10

– 11 –

Turn over



(e) (i) Wave A has a frequency of 9.0 Hz. Calculate the velocity of wave A. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Deduce the frequency of wave B. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(f) (i) State what is meant by the principle of superposition of waves. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) On the graph opposite, sketch the wave that results from the superposition of wave A and wave B at that instant. [3]

20EP11


5. This question is in two parts. Part 1 is about energy resources. Part 2 is about thermal physics.

Part 1 Energy resources

Electricity can be generated using nuclear fission, by burning fossil fuels or using pump storage hydroelectric schemes.

(a) Outline which of the three generation methods above is renewable. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) In a nuclear reactor, outline the purpose of the

(i) heat exchanger. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) moderator. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


20EP12

– 13 –

Turn over



(c) Fission of one uranium-235 nucleus releases 203 MeV.

(i) Determine the maximum amount of energy, in joule, released by 1.0 g of uranium-235 as a result of fission. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Coal has an energy density of 2.8 ×107 J kg–1.

Calculate the ratio energy density of uranium-235energy density of coal

. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) Using your answer to (c)(ii), outline why fossil fuel stations are often built near to the source of the fossil fuel but nuclear power stations are rarely close to the source of the nuclear fuel. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


20EP13



(d) (i) Describe the main principles of the operation of a pump storage hydroelectric scheme. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) A hydroelectric scheme has an efficiency of 92 %. Water stored in the dam falls through an average height of 57 m. Determine the rate of flow of water, in kg s–1, required to generate an electrical output power of 4.5 MW. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Part 2 Thermal physics

(e) Distinguish between specific heat capacity and specific latent heat. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


20EP14

– 15 –

Turn over



(f) A mass of 0.22 kg of lead spheres is placed in a well-insulated tube. The tube is turned upside down several times so that the spheres fall through an average height of 0.45 m each time the tube is turned. The temperature of the spheres is found to increase by 8 °C.

cork

lead spheres

insulated tube

cork

(i) Discuss the changes to the energy of the lead spheres. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) The specific heat capacity of lead is 1.3 ×102 J kg–1 K–1. Deduce the number of times that the tube is turned upside down. [4]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20EP15


6. This question is in two parts. Part 1 is about kinematics and Newton’s laws of motion. Part 2 is about electrical circuits.

Part 1 Kinematics and Newton’s laws of motion

Cars I and B are on a straight race track. I is moving at a constant speed of 45 m s–1 and B is initially at rest. As I passes B, B starts to move with an acceleration of 3.2 m s–2.

I passes B B passes I

I I

B B

45 m s–1

at rest, begins to move

45 m s–1

At a later time B passes I. You may assume that both cars are point particles.

(a) (i) Show that the time taken for B to pass I is approximately 28 s. [4]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Calculate the distance travelled by B in this time. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


20EP16

– 17 –

Turn over



(b) B slows down while I remains at a constant speed. The driver in each car wears a seat belt. Using Newton’s laws of motion, explain the difference in the tension in the seat belts of the two cars. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) A third car O with mass 930 kg joins the race. O collides with I from behind, moving along the same straight line as I. Before the collision the speed of I is 45 m s–1 and its mass is 850 kg. After the collision, I and O stick together and move in a straight line with an initial combined speed of 52 m s–1.

(i) Calculate the speed of O immediately before the collision. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) The duration of the collision is 0.45 s. Determine the average force acting on O. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


20EP17



Part 2 Electrical circuits

The circuit shown is used to investigate how the power developed by a cell varies when the load resistance R changes.

R

The variable resistor is adjusted and a series of current and voltage readings are taken. The graph shows the variation with R of the power dissipated in the cell and the power dissipated in the variable resistor.

P / W

1.8

1.6

1.4

1.2

1.0

0.8

0.6

0.4

0.2

0.0

power dissipated in resistor

power dissipated in cell

0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 R / Ω


20EP18

– 19 –

Turn over



(d) An ammeter and a voltmeter are used to investigate the characteristics of a variable resistor of resistance R. State how the resistance of the ammeter and of the voltmeter compare to R so that the readings of the instruments are reliable. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(e) Show that the current in the circuit is approximately 0.70 A when R = 0.80 Ω. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(f) The cell has an internal resistance.

(i) Outline what is meant by the internal resistance of a cell. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Determine the internal resistance of the cell. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


20EP19



(g) Calculate the electromotive force (emf) of the cell. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20EP20

40EP01




• Write your session number in the boxes above.• Do not open this examination paper until instructed to do so.• Answer all of the questions from two of the options.• Write your answers in the boxes provided.• A calculator is required for this paper.• A clean copy of the physics data booklet is required for this paper.• The maximum mark for this examination paper is [40 marks].

Option Questions

Option A — Sight and wave phenomena 1 – 4

Option B — Quantum physics and nuclear physics 5 – 7

Option C — Digital technology 8 – 11

Option D — Relativity and particle physics 12 – 13

Option E — Astrophysics 14 – 16

Option F — Communications 17 – 18

Option G — Electromagnetic waves 19 – 21

1 hour


Tuesday 10 November 2015 (afternoon)Candidate session number

8815 – 6506

40EP02


Option A — Sight and wave phenomena

1. This question is about the eye.

(a) Explain, with reference to spectral response, why the eye has poor colour sensitivity under scotopic vision. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Outline how the distribution of retinal cells in the eye accounts for differences in perception. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Option A continues on the following page)

40EP03

– 3 –

Turn over


(Option A continued)

2. This question is about sound waves.

A whistle on a steam train consists of a pipe that is open at one end and closed at the other. The sounding length of the whistle is 0.27 m and the steam pressure in the whistle is so great that the third harmonic of the pipe is sounding. The speed of sound in air is 340 m s–1.

(a) (i) Show that there must be a node at a distance of 0.18 m from the closed end of the pipe. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Calculate the frequency of the whistle sound. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The train is moving directly away from a stationary observer at a speed of 22 m s–1 while the whistle is sounding. Calculate the frequency heard by the observer. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


40EP04



3. This question is about diffraction and resolution.

Monochromatic light is incident normally on a single narrow slit and gives rise to a diffraction pattern on a screen.

monochromatic light

single narrow slit

screen

(a) Sketch, for the diffraction pattern produced, a graph showing the variation of the relative intensity of the light with the angle measured from the centre of the slit. [2]

relative intensity

0 angle


40EP05

– 5 –

Turn over


(Option A, question 3 continued)

(b) The single narrow slit is replaced by a double narrow slit. Explain, with reference to your answer to (a), how the Rayleigh criterion applies to the diffraction patterns produced by the light emerging from the two slits. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) Two lamps emit light of wavelength 620 nm. The lights are observed through a circular aperture of diameter 1.5 mm from a distance of 850 m. Calculate the minimum distance between the lamps so that they are resolved. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. This question is about polarization.

Mathematical calculators often use a liquid-crystal display (LCD). Outline how you would demonstrate that the display emits plane polarized light. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

End of Option A

40EP06


Option B — Quantum physics and nuclear physics

5. This question is about the photoelectric effect.

When light is incident on a clean metal surface, electrons can be emitted through the photoelectric effect.

wavelength = 620 nm

metal surface

(a) Outline how the Einstein model is used to explain the photoelectric effect. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) State why, although the incident light is monochromatic, the energies of the emitted electrons vary. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Option B continues on the following page)

40EP07

– 7 –

Turn over


(Option B, question 5 continued)

(c) Explain why no electrons are emitted if the frequency of the incident light is less than a certain value, no matter how intense the light. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(d) For monochromatic light of wavelength 620 nm a stopping potential of 1.75 V is required. Determine the minimum energy required to emit an electron from the metal surface. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


40EP08


(Option B continued)

6. This question is about energy level transitions.

Some of the electron energy levels for a hydrogen atom are shown.

0 eV

–0.85 eV

–1.51 eV

–3.40 eV

–13.6 eV ground state (not to scale)

(a) A hydrogen atom is excited to the –1.51 eV level.

(i) On the diagram, label using arrows all the possible transitions that might occur as the hydrogen atom returns to the ground state. [1]

(ii) State the energy in eV of the maximum wavelength photon emitted as the hydrogen atom returns to the ground state. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


40EP09

– 9 –

Turn over



(b) Monochromatic radiation is incident on gaseous hydrogen. All the hydrogen atoms are in the ground state. Describe what could happen to the radiation and to the hydrogen atoms if the incident photon energy is equal to

(i) 10.2 eV. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) 9.0 eV. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


40EP10



7. This question is about radioactive decay.

Meteorites contain a small proportion of radioactive aluminium-26 1326 Al( ) in the rock.

The amount of 1326 Al( ) is constant while the meteorite is in space due to bombardment with

cosmic rays.

(a) Aluminium-26 decays into an isotope of magnesium (Mg) by β+ decay.

1326 A Mg ZY

Xl → + ++β

Identify X, Y and Z in this nuclear decay process. [2]

X: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Y: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Z: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Explain why the beta particles emitted from the aluminium-26 have a continuous range of energies. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


40EP11

– 11 –

Turn over



(c) After reaching Earth, the number of radioactive decays per unit time in a meteorite sample begins to diminish with time. The half-life of aluminium-26 is 7.2 105 years.

(i) State what is meant by half-life. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) A meteorite which has just fallen to Earth has an activity of 36.8 Bq. A second meteorite of the same mass, which arrived some time ago, has an activity of 11.2 Bq. Determine, in years, the time since the second meteorite arrived on Earth. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

End of Option B

40EP12



Answers written on this page will not be marked.

40EP13

– 13 –

Turn over


Option C — Digital technology

8. The question is about data storage capacity.

(a) Printed text is being converted to a digital form so that it is more portable. State one other reason for the conversion of text into a digital format. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) A publisher is converting all its books into digital form. Estimate how many pages of text can be stored on a CD that has a storage capacity of 700 M byte. Each letter or symbol on the page is represented by 16 bits. On average, there are 500 words per page. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Option C continues on the following page)

40EP14


(Option C continued)

9. This question is about charge-coupled devices (CCDs).

(a) Definecapacitance. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Photons of a certain frequency are incident on the surface of a CCD.

The following data are available. Intensity of the photons incident on the CCD = 1.6 mW m–2

Area of the pixel = 2.1 10–12 m2

Energy carried by a photon = 4.8 10–19 J QuantumefficiencyofCCD = 60 % Capacitance of a pixel = 170 pF

Show that the potential difference across the pixel will be 0.6 μV after it has been exposed to light for 0.15 s. [4]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


40EP15

– 15 –

Turn over


(Option C, question 9 continued)

(c) The graph shows how the analogue output signal from the pixel varies with the potential difference that is developed across the pixel. This analogue signal is then converted into an equivalent 4-bit digital signal.

analogue output

25

20

15

10

5

0 0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 potential difference / μV

Using your answer to (b) and the graph, state the 4-bit digital output from this pixel. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


40EP16



10. Thisquestionisaboutanamplifiercircuit.

Thediagramshowsanamplifiercircuitincorporatinganidealoperationalamplifier(op-amp).

VIN

+15 V

– 15 V 20 k

4 k

VOUT

(a) (i) Calculate the gain of the circuit. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


40EP17

– 17 –

Turn over



(ii) Using the axis, sketch the variation with input voltage VIN of the output voltage VOUT . [3]

VOUT

VIN


40EP18



(b) The circuit is now rearranged to function as a Schmitt trigger.

+5 V

4 k

VIN 20 k

VOUT

The output of the Schmitt trigger is positive saturation (+15 V) or negative saturation (–15 V). Calculate the input value that will cause the output to switch from –15 V to +15 V. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11. This question is about mobile phones.

The number of mobile phones has grown rapidly in recent years. Discuss environmental issues associated with this rapid increase. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

End of Option C

40EP19

– 19 –

Turn over




40EP20


Option D — Relativity and particle physics

12. This question is about relativistic kinematics.

(a) State what is meant by an inertial frame of reference. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Aspacecraftisflyinginastraightlineaboveabasestationataspeedof0.8c.

0.8c

base station

surface of planet

Suzanne is inside the spacecraft and Juan is on the base station.

(i) Alightonthebasestationflashesregularly.AccordingtoSuzanne,thelightflashesevery3seconds.Calculatehowoftenthelightflashesaccordingto Juan. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Option D continues on the following page)

40EP21

– 21 –

Turn over


(Option D, question 12 continued)

(ii) While moving away from the base station, Suzanne observes another spacecraft travelling towards her at a speed of 0.8c. Using Galilean transformations, calculate the relative speed of the two spacecraft. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) Using the postulates of special relativity, state and explain why Galilean transformationscannotbeusedinthiscasetofindtherelativespeedsofthetwo spacecraft. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iv) Using relativistic kinematics, the relative speeds of the two spacecraft is shown to be 0.976c. Suzanne measures the other spacecraft to have a length of 8.00 m. Calculate the proper length of the other spacecraft. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) Suzanne’s spacecraft is on a journey to a star. According to Juan, the distance from the base station to the star is 11.4 ly. Show that Suzanne measures the time taken for her to travel from the base station to the star to be about 9 years. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


40EP22


(Option D continued)

13. This question is about interactions and quarks.

(a) A lambda baryon Λ0 is composed of the three quarks uds. Show that the charge is 0 and the strangeness is –1. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) For the lambda baryon Λ0, a student proposes a possible decay of Λ0 as shown.

Λ0 → + −p K

The quark content of the Λ0 → + −p K meson is us.

(i) Discuss, with reference to strangeness and baryon number, why this proposal is feasible. [4]

Strangeness:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Baryon number:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


40EP23

– 23 –

Turn over



(ii) Another interaction is

0 p −Λ → + π .

In this interaction strangeness is found not to be conserved. Deduce the nature of this interaction. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) The exchange particle involved in the interaction has a rest mass 80.4 GeV c–2. Calculate the range of the weak interaction. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

End of Option D

40EP24


Option E — Astrophysics

14. This question is about determining the distance to a nearby star.

Two photographs of the night sky are taken, one six months after the other. When the photographs are compared, one star appears to have shifted from position A to position B, relative to the other stars.

(a) Outline why the star appears to have shifted from position A to position B. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Option E continues on the following page)

40EP25

– 25 –

Turn over


(Option E, question 14 continued)

(b) The observed angular displacement of the star is θ and the diameter of the Earth’s orbit is d. The distance from the Earth to the star is D.

(i) Draw a diagram showing d, D and θ. [1]

(ii) Explain the relationship between d, D and θ. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) One consistent set of units for D and θ are parsecs and arc-seconds. State one other consistent set of units for this pair of quantities. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


40EP26



(c) Suggest whether the distance from Earth to this star can be determined using spectroscopic parallax. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


40EP27

– 27 –

Turn over


(Option E continued)

15. This question is about the Hertzsprung–Russell (HR) diagram and the Sun.

A Hertzsprung–Russell (HR) diagram is shown.

absolute magnitude

Sun

25 000 10 000 7500 6000 4500 3000 temperature / K

(a) Explain why absolute magnitude rather than apparent magnitude is used for the vertical axis on an HR diagram. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


40EP28



(b) Outline why the scale selected for temperature on the HR diagram is not linear. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) The following data are given for the Sun and a star Vega.

Luminosity of the Sun = 3.85 1026 W Luminosity of Vega = 1.54 1028 W Surface temperature of the Sun = 5800 K Surface temperature of Vega = 9600 K

Determine, using the data, the radius of Vega in terms of solar radii. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(d) Outline how observers on Earth can determine experimentally the temperature of a distant star. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


40EP29

– 29 –

Turn over


(Option E continued)

16. This question is about cosmic microwave background (CMB) radiation.

One of Newton’s assumptions was that the universe is static. The peak intensity of the cosmic microwave background (CMB) radiation has a wavelength of 1.06 mm.

(a) Show that this corresponds to a temperature around 3 K. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Suggest how the discovery of the CMB in the microwave region contradicts Newton’s assumption of the static universe. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

End of Option E

40EP30


Option F — Communications

17. This question is about modulation and satellite communication.

(a) State what is meant by modulation. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) A telephone call is transmitted as a radio signal from Europe to an explorer in South America.

(i) Outline why amplitude modulation (AM) is most suitable for this transmission. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Option F continues on the following page)

40EP31

– 31 –

Turn over


(Option F, question 17 continued)

(ii) A carrier wave of frequency 2.5 MHz is used to transmit a signal wave of frequency 40 kHz. Sketch a power spectrum of the AM carrier wave. [2]

power

0

frequency / kHz

(iii) The radio signal must be broadcast within a frequency band between 2.4 MHz and 2.8 MHz. The radio transmits a maximum signal frequency of 40 kHz. Calculate the number of radio signals that can be transmitted within the band. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


40EP32



(c) Signals can be transmitted using either geostationary or polar-orbiting satellites. Discuss one advantage for each type of satellite. [4]

Geostationary:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Polar-orbiting:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


40EP33

– 33 –

Turn over


(Option F continued)

18. Thisquestionisaboutsamplingandfibreoptics.

Time-divisionmultiplexingisusedtotransmitmultiplesignalsalonganopticfibre.

(a) (i) Describe how time-division multiplexing is achieved. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Cost is one advantage of time-division multiplexing. State one other advantage of time-division multiplexing. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


40EP34



(b) An audio signal is sampled at a sampling frequency of 4.0 kHz. Each sample is converted to an 8-bit binary number. Each bit in the sample takes 8.0 µs to input into thefibre.Determinethemaximumnumberofsignalsthatcanbetransmittedalongthefibreusingtime-divisionmultiplexing. [4]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) Anopticfibrehaslength3.0 104 m and attenuation per unit length 0.080 dB km–1. Calculate the minimum input power of the signal if the output power is not to fall below 2.0 mW. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

End of Option F

40EP35

– 35 –

Turn over


Option G — Electromagnetic waves

19. This question is about some properties of light.

(a) A space tourist travels from the surface of the Earth. When she leaves the Earth at 12:00 midday the sky appears blue. When she arrives at the limits of the atmosphere one hour later, she observes the sky to be black. Describe the reason for the change in colour of the sky during this journey. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Carbon dioxide is a gas which occurs naturally in the atmosphere. One of the natural frequencies of vibration of carbon dioxide has a period of 5 10 –14 s.

Frequency of infrared radiation from the Sun = around 300 THz Frequency of infrared radiation emitted from the Earth = around 30 THz

Radiated energy from the Sun is trapped within the system that consists of the Earth and its atmosphere. Using a calculation, outline the mechanisms that lead to this process. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Option G continues on the following page)

40EP36


(Option G continued)

20. This question is about a converging (convex) lens.

Anna is unable to read small print in a newspaper. She uses a convex lens to read text more easily. Anna looks through the lens at an arrow on the page.

F F

convex lens

(a) (i) On the diagram, construct rays to locate the image of the arrow. The focal points of the lens are labelled F. [3]

(ii) Anna places a screen at the image position. Outline why she cannot see an image on the screen. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


40EP37

– 37 –

Turn over


(Option G, question 20 continued)

(b) Annausesthesamelenswithanilluminatedobject.Shefindsthataclearimageof the object is formed when the lens is placed a distance of 20 cm from the screen. Thelenshasafocallengthof5cm.Determinethemagnificationoftheimage. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


40EP38


(Option G continued)

21. This question is about interference of light.

Coherent monochromatic light is incident on two narrow slits S1 and S2 a distance d apart. A screen is placed a distance D from the slits. An interference pattern of bright fringes and dark fringes appears on the screen. The central maximum is at Q.

S1

dS2

slits

D

P

Q

dark fringe

bright fringe

dark fringe

screen

(a) State one way to ensure that the light incident on the slits is coherent. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Light emerging from S1 and S2 reaches the screen. Explain why the screen appears dark at point P. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


40EP39

– 39 –

Turn over


(Option G, question 21 continued)

(c) Whenredlightofwavelength660nmisusedthefirstfringeatPsubtendsanangle0.0045 rad from midpoint of S1 and S2 .

S1

dS2

slits

θred = 0.0045 rad

D

P

Q

firstdarkfringefor red light

screen

(i) Determine the change in angle when blue light of wavelength 440 nm is used. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Usingthediagrambelow,drawtheapproximatepositionofthefirstbrightfringeusingbluelight.ThepositionofthefirstdarkfringewithredlightislabelledP. [1]

S1

dS2

slits

D

P

Q

screen

End of Option G

40EP40



N15/4/PHYSI/SP3/ENG/TZ0/XX/M

14 pages

Markscheme

November 2015

Physics

Standard level

Paper 3

– 2 – N15/4/PHYSI/SP3/ENG/TZ0/XX/M

This markscheme is the property of the International Baccalaureate and must not be reproduced or distributed to any other person without the authorization of the IB Assessment Centre.


Subject Details: Physics SL Paper 3 Markscheme Mark Allocation Candidates are required to answer questions from TWO of the Options [2 20 marks]. Maximum total = [40 marks] 1. A markscheme often has more marking points than the total allows. This is intentional.

2. Each marking point has a separate line and the end is shown by means of a semicolon (;).

3. An alternative answer or wording is indicated in the markscheme by a slash (/). Either wording can be accepted.

4. Words in brackets ( ) in the markscheme are not necessary to gain the mark.

5. Words that are underlined are essential for the mark.

6. The order of marking points does not have to be as in the markscheme, unless stated otherwise.


Option A — Sight and wave phenomena 1. (a) scotopic vision uses rods (not cones); the spectral response of all rods peaks at the same wavelength; so rods can only signal presence or absence of light; three types of cones respond to different peak wavelengths (allowing colour vision); [3 max] The second and fourth marking points may be shown on a spectral response

graph. (b) cones found in fovea/centre allowing clear colour vision; rods over rest of retina allow better night sight/motion/peripheral vision; [2] 2. (a) (i) third harmonic means 1.5 loops; (accept in form of a diagram)

2

0.27 ( 0.18)3 ; [1 max]

(ii) length is 3

4 of a wavelength so 0.36m ;

940Hzf ; [2]

(b) 340

940340 22

f ;

880 Hz; [2] 3. (a) large central peak and at least one subsidiary maximum on each side;

minima have intensity of zero and intensity of secondary maxima at most 25 % of central maximum;

(judge by eye) [2]

(b) explanation of resolving – seeing images as being from separate objects; idea of diffraction patterns overlapping; central maximum being at least as far from companion as the first minimum; [3]

(c) equating 1.22b

to

D

x;

0.43 (m) ; [2] 4. use polarizing filter/Polaroid and place over display and rotate; when display becomes totally dark the Polaroids are crossed; the planes of polarization are at right angles so the display must emit plane polarized light; [3]


Option B — Quantum physics and nuclear physics 5. (a) light made of photons of energy E h f ; electrons are released immediately from the metal; if electron gains sufficient energy (from a photon); [2 max] (b) different electrons may be bound by a different amount of energy to the metal; [1] (c) insufficient photon energy to eject surface electrons; greater intensity means more photons but still none with enough energy; [2]

(d) 19 19max (1.75 1.60 10 ) 2.80 10 JE ;

8

34 19 20max 9

106.63 10 2.80 10 4.1 10

62

3.00J

0 10h E

f ; [2]

6. (a) (i) only the three correct arrows on diagram; [1] (–1.51 to –3.40, –1.15 to –13.6 and –3.40 to –13.6) (ii) 1.89 eV; [1] (b) (i) photon is absorbed; electron (in a hydrogen atom) raised to higher/–3.40 eV/excited state; [2] (ii) no absorption / photon pass through; [1] 7. (a) X: 26 and Y: 12; (both needed for [1]) Z: v/neutrino; [2] Do not allow the antineutrino. (b) total energy released is fixed; neutrino carries some of this energy; (leaving the beta particle with a range of energies) [2] (c) (i) the time taken for half the radioactive nuclides to decay / the time taken for

the activity to decrease to half its initial value; [1] Do not allow reference to change in weight.

(ii) l 7

5

n29.63 10

7.2 10

;

79.63 1011.2 36.8

te

;

61.24 10 yrt ; [3]


Option C — Digital technology 8. (a) ability to make more copies easily / faster retrieval / text can be manipulated /

more can be stored in the same volume; [1] Allow any other sensible suggestion. (b) estimation 3000 characters per page; (allow a range between 2000 and 4000) number of bits per page 3000 16( 48000) ;

number of pages6

5700 10 8(1.17 10 )

3000 16

; [3]

Allow sensible answers based on estimation of characters per page.

9. (a) the ratio of charge to potential difference / Q

CV

with pronumerals explained; [1]

(b) energy received by pixel 3 12 161.6 10 2.1 10 0.15 ( 5.04 10 J) ;

number of photons incident on the pixel16

19

5.04( 1050)

4.8

10

10

;

number of electrons ejected 1050 ( 00 3 ).6 6 ;

19

12

630 1.6 10

170 10

QV

C

or 75.9 10 V ; [4]

(c) digital output 1100; [1]


10. (a) (i) 20

14

G ;

6 ; [2] (ii) V

OUT

15

– 12

9

12

– 9

– 15

6

– 6

3

– 3

– 1.0 0.0 3.01.0 2.0 4.0– 2.0– 4.0 – 3.00 V

IN

general shape of graph correct; straight line between –2.5 V and 2.5 V; plateau at –15 V and +15 V beyond this; [3] (b) switch over happens when non-inverting input 5 V ;

current through the 203 3

5 ( 15) 20k 1mA

20 10 20 10

;

IN (5 [1 mA 4 k ] 5 4 ) 9 VV ; [3] 11. damage caused by mining for precious metals; high rate of disposal/landfill; masts detract from beauty in some areas; [2 max]


Option D — Relativity and particle physics 12. (a) a coordinate system; that is not accelerating / where Newton’s first law applies; [2]

(b) (i) 2

11.67

1 0.8

;

0

31.8 s

1.67t

; [2]

(ii) 1.6c; [1] (iii) (one of the) postulates states that the speed of light in a vacuum is the

same for all inertial observers; Galilean transformation will give a relative speed greater than the speed

of light; [2]

(iv) 2

1( 4.59)

1 0.976

;

0 (4.5 .00 ) 36.7 m6 8 l ; [2]

(c) 11.4

0.8

st

v 14.25 years;

0

14.25

1.67

tt

8.6 years; [2]

Accept length contraction with the same result.

13. (a) 2 1 1

03 3 3

for charge;

any particle containing a strange quark has strangeness of 1 ; [2] (b) (i) strangeness: the p has a strangeness of 0; the K particle has a strangeness of 1 ; baryon number: lambda and protons are baryons each having a baryon number of 1 ;

the K meson has a baryon number of 0; [4] (ii) only during the weak interaction strangeness is not conserved (therefore it

is a weak interaction); [1]

(iii) 9

2 27 256

80.4 1080.4 GeV c 1.661 10 1.43 10 kg

931.5 10m

;

34

1825 8

6.63 101.23 10

4 1.43 10 3m

10R

; [2]


Option E — Astrophysics 14. (a) the star is (much) closer than the other star (and close enough to Earth) / parallax

effect has been observed; [1] (b) (i)

d

D

θ

[1] Award [1] if all three (d, D, ) are shown correctly. Accept D as a line from Earth to the star.

(ii) sin2 2

d

D

or tan

2 2

d

D

or d

D ;

consistent explanation, eg: small angle of approximation yields d

D ; [2]

(iii) any angular unit quoted for and any linear unit quoted for D; [1] (c) (yes) star is close enough (in local galaxy) to determine spectral characteristics; [1]


15. (a) HR diagram refers to real stars / absolute magnitude depends on (inherent) properties of the star / absolute magnitude is a measure of brightness at a distance of 10 pc;

any relevant info about apparent magnitude, eg: apparent magnitude depends on distance; [2]

(b) to cover a wide range of orders of magnitude; smaller values would be lost on a linear scale / the logarithmic scale allows more

stars to be shown on the diagram (making the diagram more relevant); [2]

(c) 4 2 4

V V V V V4 2 4

S S S S S

[ ] [ ] [ ]

[ ] [ ] [ ]

A T r T

A T T

L

L r

;

228 4

V26 2 4

S

[ ]1.54 10 9600

3.85 10 [ ] 5800

r

r

;

28 4

V S S26 4

1.54 10 58002.3

3.85 10 9600r r r

; [3]

(d) obtain the spectrum of the star; measure the position of the wavelength corresponding to maximum intensity;

use Wien’s law (to determine temperature);

(allow quotation of Wien’s equation if symbols defined)

[3]

Award [3 max] for referring to identification of temperature via different ionizations of different elements.

16. (a) 3 3

3max

2.90 10 2.90 10

1.06 10T

;

2.7 K; [2] (b) current low temperature observed is a result of expansion; (expansion) has caused cooling from high temperatures; [2]


Option F — Communications 17. (a) the modification/change of a carrier wave by addition of a signal wave/information; [1] (b) (i) (voice signal only requires) low quality; AM has lower band width requirement than FM; simpler (more reliable) circuits; range greater than FM / can bounce off the ionosphere; [2 max] (ii)

power

02460

frequency / kHz2500 2540

central band drawn at correct position; shorter side bands at correct positions; [2]

(iii) 6

3

0.4 10

80 10

5; [1]


(c) geostationary: [2 max] Allow one advantage plus argument: always above the same point of the Earth / no tracking dish required / allows for

continuous communication / outside Earth’s atmosphere so last longer in orbit / can be positioned permanently in sunlight for its power supply;

evidence of the mentioned / any relevant argument; or Allow any two advantages: always above the same point of the Earth; no tracking dish required; allows for continuous communication; outside Earth’s atmosphere so last longer in orbit; can be positioned permanently in sunlight for its power supply; polar-orbiting: [2 max] Allow one advantage plus argument: lower orbit / less power required at both ground station and satellite / cheaper to

put into orbit / coverage of whole planet over a number of orbits; evidence of the mentioned / any relevant argument; or Allow any two advantages: lower orbit; less power required at both ground station and satellite; cheaper to put into orbit; coverage of whole planet over a number of orbits; [4 max] 18. (a) (i) (a digital) signal is split up for transmission and recombined at the end of the

process / the signal is transmitted in pulses; other signals can be transmitted in the spaces between the pulses; [2] (ii) the bit rate is higher / more data sent per unit time; faster transmission of data; making use of empty space between samples; [1 max]

(b) time between samples1

250 s4000

;

duration of sample 8 bit 8 64s s ;

number of samples transmitted250

3.964

signals;

so three signals maximum; [4] (c) attenuation 0.08 30.0 ( 2.4dB) ;

12.4 10log2 mW

I;

1 I 3.5 mW; [3]


Option G — Electromagnetic waves 19. (a) sky is blue due to scattering of light from Sun (by particles, nitrogen molecules); blue scatters better / as the atmosphere (becomes) less dense less scattering

occurs; (finally) the sun’s light is not scattered and “the sky” is black (meaning no light

between point light sources); [3]

(b) natural frequency of carbon dioxide 1314

12 10 z

5 1H

0

;

infrared from the Sun is well outside this value so transmitted; infrared from the Earth is close to this value so absorbed/scattered/trapped; [3] 20. (a) (i)

F F

convex lens

image

any correct ray out of the three shown above; second ray correct; image correctly located and labelled; [3] (ii) the image is virtual; no light rays pass through this point; [2]

(b) 1 1 1

u v

f;

20

3u ;

60

( )320

vm

u

; [3]


21. (a) single slit before the double slit / use a laser light / single source; [1] (b) destructive interference; path lengths from slits differ by half a wavelength;

waves arrive antiphase / 180out of phase / out of phase; [2 max]

(c) (i) red blueblue

red

0.0045 440nm0.0030rad

660nm

;

blue (0.0045 0.0030 ) 0.0015rad ; [2]

(ii) marking direction of shift on the diagram; [1]

S1 S2

P

Qd

position of first bright fringe using blue light


© International Baccalaureate Organization 201615 pages


45 minutes

Tuesday 8 November 2016 (morning)




8816 – 6504

N16/4/PHYSI/SPM/ENG/TZ0/XX– 2 –

1. A boy jumps from a wall 3 m high. What is an estimate of the change in momentum of the boy when he lands without rebounding?

A. 5 100 kg m s–1

B. 5 101 kg m s–1

C. 5 102 kg m s–1

D. 5 103 kg m s–1

2. Light of wavelength 400 nm is incident on two slits separated by 1000 mm. The interference pattern from the slits is observed from a satellite orbiting 0.4 Mm above the Earth. The distance between interference maxima as detected at the satellite is

A. 0.16 Mm.

B. 0.16 km.

C. 0.16 m.

D. 0.16 mm.

3. A car moves north at a constant speed of 3 m s–1 for 20 s and then east at a constant speed of 4 m s–1 for 20 s. What is the average speed of the car during this motion?

A. 7.0 m s–1

B. 5.0 m s–1

C. 3.5 m s–1

D. 2.5 m s–1


Turn over

4. An object of weight W is falling vertically at a constant speed in a fluid. What is the magnitude of the drag force acting on the object?

A. 0

B. 2

W

C. W

D. 2W

5. An object, initially at rest, is accelerated by a constant force. Which graphs show the variation with time t of the kinetic energy and the variation with time t of the speed of the object?

A. kinetic energy speed

B. kinetic energy speed

C. kinetic energy speed

D. kinetic energy speed


6. Two stationary objects of mass 1 kg and 2 kg are connected by a thread and suspended from a spring.

spring

1 kg

thread

2 kg

The thread is cut. Immediately after the cut, what are the magnitudes of the accelerations of the objects in terms of the acceleration due to gravity g ?

Acceleration of 1 kg object

Acceleration of 2 kg object

A. 3 g 2 g

B. 2 g 2 g

C. 3 g 1 g

D. 2 g 1 g

7. A student of weight 600 N climbs a vertical ladder 6.0 m tall in a time of 8.0 s. What is the power developed by the student against gravity?

A. 22 W

B. 45 W

C. 220 W

D. 450 W


Turn over

8. A ball of mass m strikes a vertical wall with a speed v at an angle of q to the wall. The ball rebounds at the same speed and angle. What is the change in the magnitude of the momentum of the ball?

v

q qv

A. 2 mv sin q

B. 2 mv cos q

C. 2 mv

D. zero

9. Two objects m1 and m2 approach each other along a straight line with speeds v1 and v2 as shown. The objects collide and stick together.

v1 v2

m1 m2

What is the total change of linear momentum of the objects as a result of the collision?

A. m1v1 + m2v2

B. m1v1 – m2v2

C. m2v2 – m1v1

D. zero


10. Energy is supplied at a constant rate to a fixed mass of a material. The material begins as a solid. The graph shows the variation of the temperature of the material with time.

temperature

time

The specific heat capacities of the solid, liquid and gaseous forms of the material are cs cl and cg respectively. What can be deduced about the values of cs cl and cg?

A. cs > cg > cl

B. cl > cs > cg

C. cl > cg > cs

D. cg > cs > cl


Turn over

11. An ideal gas of N molecules is maintained at a constant pressure p. The graph shows how the volume V of the gas varies with absolute temperature T.

V

00 T

What is the gradient of the graph?

A. Np

B. NRp

C. BNkp

D. NRp

12. The pressure of a fixed mass of an ideal gas in a container is decreased at constant temperature. For the molecules of the gas there will be a decrease in

A. the mean square speed.

B. the number striking the container walls every second.

C. the force between them.

D. their diameter.


13. A body undergoes one oscillation of simple harmonic motion (shm). What is correct for the direction of the acceleration of the body and the direction of its velocity?

A. Always opposite

B. Opposite for half a period

C. Opposite for a quarter of a period

D. Never opposite

14. A particle oscillates with simple harmonic motion (shm) of period T. Which graph shows the variation with time of the kinetic energy of the particle?

A. kineticenergy

0 T time

B. kineticenergy

0 T time

C. kineticenergy

0 T time

D. kineticenergy

0 T time


Turn over

15. A light ray is incident on an air–diamond boundary. The refractive index of diamond is greater than 1. Which diagram shows the correct path of the light ray?

A.

airdiamond

B.

airdiamond

C.

airdiamond

D.

airdiamond

16. A spring XY lies on a frictionless table with the end Y free.

direction of travel table

A horizontal pulse travels along the spring from X to Y. What happens when the pulse reaches Y?

A. The pulse will be reflected towards X and inverted.

B. The pulse will be reflected towards X and not be inverted.

C. Y will move and the pulse will disappear.

D. Y will not move and the pulse will disappear.


17. A student stands a distance L from a wall and claps her hands. Immediately on hearing the reflection from the wall she claps her hands again. She continues to do this, so that successive claps and the sound of reflected claps coincide. The frequency at which she claps her hands is f . What is the speed of sound in air?

A. 2Lf

B. Lf

C. L f

D. 2 L f

18. A – 5 mC charge and a +10 mC charge are a fixed distance apart.

+10 mC – 5 mC

position I position II position III not to scale

Where can the electric field be zero?

A. position I only

B. position II only

C. position III only

D. positions I, II and III


Turn over

19. An electrical circuit is shown with loop X and junction Y.

X E R1

I2 R2

I3 R3

I1

Y

What is the correct expression of Kirchhoff’s circuit laws for loop X and junction Y?

Loop X Junction Y

A. –E = I1R1 + I3R3 I1 = I2 + I3

B. –E = I1R1 + I3R3 I1 + I2 = I3

C. E = I1R1 – I3R3 I1 = I2 + I3

D. E = I1R1 – I3R3 I1 + I2 = I3


20. A cell of emf 4 V and negligible internal resistance is connected to three resistors as shown. Two resistors of resistance 2 W are connected in parallel and are in series with a resistor of resistance 1 W.

4 V

2 W

1 W

2 W

What power is dissipated in one of the 2 W resistors and in the whole circuit?

Power dissipated in 2 W resistor / W

Power dissipated in whole circuit / W

A. 2 6

B. 1 6

C. 0.5 8

D. 2 8

21. A wire carrying a current I is at right angles to a uniform magnetic field of strength B. A magnetic force F is exerted on the wire. Which force acts when the same wire is placed

at right angles to a uniform magnetic field of strength 2B when the current is 4I

?

A. 4F

B. 2F

C. F

D. 2F


Turn over

22. An object at the end of a wooden rod rotates in a vertical circle at a constant angular velocity. What is correct about the tension in the rod?

A. It is greatest when the object is at the bottom of the circle.

B. It is greatest when the object is halfway up the circle.

C. It is greatest when the object is at the top of the circle.

D. It is unchanged throughout the motion.

23. On Mars, the gravitational field strength is about 14

of that on Earth. The mass of Earth is approximately ten times that of Mars.

What is radius of Earthradius of Mars

?

A. 0.4

B. 0.6

C. 1.6

D. 2.5

24. Photons of energy 2.3 eV are incident on a low-pressure vapour. The energy levels of the atoms in the vapour are shown.

0 eV

–1.6 eV

–2.5 eV

–3.9 eV not to scale

What energy transition will occur when a photon is absorbed by the vapour?

A. –3.9 eV to –1.6 eV

B. –1.6 eV to 0 eV

C. –1.6 eV to –3.9 eV

D. 0 eV to –1.6 eV


25. When an alpha particle collides with a nucleus of nitrogen-14 147( N), a nucleus X can be produced

together with a proton. What is X?

A. 188 X

B. 178 X

C. 189 X

D. 179 X

26. The mass defect for deuterium is 4 10–30 kg. What is the binding energy of deuterium?

A. 4 10–7 eV

B. 8 10–2 eV

C. 2 106 eV

D. 2 1012 eV

27. As quarks separate from each other within a hadron, the interaction between them becomes larger. What is the nature of this interaction?

A. Electrostatic

B. Gravitational

C. Strong nuclear

D. Weak nuclear


28. The Sankey diagram represents the energy flow for a coal-fired power station.

energy to customers

energy used in transmission

energy used in power station

thermal energy loss in power station

What is the overall efficiency of the power station?

A. 0.3

B. 0.4

C. 0.6

D. 0.7

29. Which of the following is not a primary energy source?

A. Wind turbine

B. Jet Engine

C. Coal-fired power station

D. Nuclear power station

30. What are the principal energy changes in a photovoltaic cell and in a solar heating panel?

Photovoltaic cell Solar heating panel

A. solar to electrical solar to thermal

B. solar to thermal solar to thermal

C. solar to electrical electrical to thermal

D. solar to thermal electrical to thermal

N16/4/PHYSI/SPM/ENG/TZ0/XX/M

2 pages

Markscheme

November 2016

Physics

Standard level

Paper 1

– 2 – N16/4/PHYSI/SPM/ENG/TZ0/XX/M

1. C 16. B 31. – 46. – 2. B 17. D 32. – 47. – 3. C 18. C 33. – 48. – 4. C 19. A 34. – 49. – 5. A 20. D 35. – 50. – 6. D 21. B 36. – 51. – 7. D 22. A 37. – 52. – 8. A 23. C 38. – 53. – 9. D 24. A 39. – 54. – 10. D 25. B 40. – 55. – 11. C 26. C 41. – 56. – 12. B 27. C 42. – 57. – 13. B 28. A 43. – 58. – 14. D 29. B 44. – 59. – 15. A 30. A 45. – 60. –

12EP01



1 hour 15 minutes

Tuesday 8 November 2016 (morning)Candidate session number



• Write your session number in the boxes above.• Do not open this examination paper until instructed to do so.• Answer all questions.• Write your answers in the boxes provided.• A calculator is required for this paper.• A clean copy of the physics data booklet is required for this paper.• The maximum mark for this examination paper is [50 marks].

8816 – 6505


12EP02

– 2 –


1. Atennisballishitwitharacketfromapoint1.5mabovethefloor.Theceilingis8.0mabovethefloor.Theinitialvelocityoftheballis15ms–1at50° above the horizontal. Assume that air resistance is negligible.

15 m s–1

50°

1.5 m

ceiling

8.0m

floor

(a) Determine whether the ball will hit the ceiling. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Thetennisballwasstationarybeforebeinghit.Ithasamassof5.810–2 kg and was in contact with the racket for 23 ms.

(i) Calculate the mean force exerted by the racket on the ball. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Explain how Newton’s third law applies when the racket hits the tennis ball. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


12EP03

– 3 –

Turn over

2. Curling is a game played on a horizontal ice surface. A player pushes a large smooth stone acrosstheiceforseveralsecondsandthenreleasesit.Thestonemovesuntilfrictionbringsittorest.Thegraphshowsthevariationofspeedofthestonewithtime.

speed

v

00 3.5 17.5 time/s

Thetotaldistancetravelledbythestonein17.5sis29.8m.

(a) Determine the maximum speed v of the stone. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) (i) Thestonehasamassof20kg.Determinethefrictionalforceonthestoneduringthelast14.0s. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Determinetheenergydissipatedduetofrictionduringthelast14.0s. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


12EP04

– 4 –

3. (a) Defineinternal energy. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) 0.46moleofanidealmonatomicgasistrappedinacylinder.Thegashasavolumeof21 m3 and a pressure of 1.4 Pa.

(i) State how the internal energy of an ideal gas differs from that of a real gas. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Determine, in kelvin, the temperature of the gas in the cylinder. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) Thekinetictheoryofidealgasesisoneexampleofascientificmodel.Identifyone reasonwhyscientistsfindsuchmodelsuseful. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


12EP05

– 5 –

Turn over

4. (a) A particular K meson has a quark structure us. State the charge on this meson. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) TheFeynmandiagramshowsthechangesthatoccurduringbetaminus(β–) decay.

Label the diagram by inserting the four missing particle symbols. [2]

(c) Carbon-14 (C-14) is a radioactive isotope which undergoes beta minus (β–) decay to the stable isotope nitrogen-14 (N-14). Energy is released during this decay. Explain why the mass of a C-14 nucleus and the mass of a N-14 nucleus are slightly different even though they have the same nucleon number. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


12EP06

–6–

5. (a) Twomicrowavetransmitters,XandY,areplaced12cmapartandareconnectedtothesame source. A single receiver is placed 54 cm away and moves along a line AB that is paralleltothelinejoiningXandY.

microwave source

X

Y12 cm

54 cm

A

receiver

B

Maxima and minima of intensity are detected at several points along AB.

(i) Explain the formation of the intensity minima. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Thedistancebetweenthecentralmaximumandthefirstminimumis7.2cm.Calculate the wavelength of the microwaves. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



12EP07

–7–

Turn over


(b) Radiowavesareemittedbyastraightconductingrodantenna(aerial).Theplaneofpolarization of these waves is parallel to the transmitting antenna.

polarized radio waves

56km

transmitting antenna receiving antenna

An identical antenna is used for reception. Suggest why the receiving antenna needs to be be parallel to the transmitting antenna. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



12EP08

–8–


(c) Thereceivingantennabecomesmisalignedby30° to its original position.

transmitting antenna

30° receiving antenna

original position

position after misalignment

Thepowerofthereceivedsignalinthisnewpositionis12µW.

(i) Calculate the power that was received in the original position. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Calculate the minimum time between the wave leaving the transmitting antenna and its reception. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


12EP09

–9–

Turn over

6. (a) (i) Definegravitational field strength. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) StatetheSIunitforgravitationalfieldstrength. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) A planet orbits the Sun in a circular orbit with orbital period T and orbital radius R. ThemassoftheSunisM.

(i) Show that 2 34 RT

GM=

π . [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) TheEarth’sorbitaroundtheSunisalmostcircularwithradius1.5 1011 m. Estimate the mass of the Sun. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


12EP10

–10–

7. ThegraphshowshowcurrentI varies with potential difference V for a resistor R and a non-ohmiccomponentT.

I/A

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.0

T

R

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

V/V

(a) (i) StatehowtheresistanceofTvarieswiththecurrentgoingthroughT. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Deduce, without a numerical calculation, whether R orThasthegreaterresistance at I =0.40A. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



12EP11

– 11 –

Turn over


(b) ComponentsRandTareplacedinacircuit.Bothmetersareideal.

SliderZofthepotentiometerismovedfromYtoX.

(i) State what happens to the magnitude of the current in the ammeter. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Estimate, with an explanation, the voltmeter reading when the ammeter reads0.20A. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


12EP12

– 12 –

8. Thefollowingdataareavailableforanaturalgaspowerstationthathasahighefficiency.

Rate of consumption of natural gas =14.6kgs–1

Specificenergyofnaturalgas = 55.5 MJ kg–1

Efficiencyofelectricalpowergeneration =59.0% Mass of CO2 generated per kg of natural gas =2.75kg One year =3.16 × 107 s

(a) Calculate, with a suitable unit, the electrical power output of the power station. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Calculate the mass of CO2 generated in a year assuming the power station operates continuously. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) Explain, using your answer to (b), why countries are being asked to decrease their dependence on fossil fuels. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(d) Describe, in terms of energy transfers, how thermal energy of the burning gas becomes electrical energy. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

N16/4/PH

YSI/SP2/ENG

/TZ0/XX/M

17 pages

Markschem

e

Novem

ber 2016

Physics

Standard level

Paper 2

–2 –

N16/4/PH

YSI/SP2/ENG

/TZ0/XX/M

This markschem

e is the property of the International Baccalaureate and m

ust not be reproduced or distributed to any other person w

ithout the authorization of the IB

Assessm

ent Centre.

– 3 – N

16/4/PHYSI/SP2/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

G

eneral Marking Instructions

1.

Follow the m

arkscheme provided, aw

ard only whole m

arks and mark only in R

ED.

2. M

ake sure that the question you are about to mark is highlighted in the m

ark panel on the right-hand side of the screen. 3.

Where a m

ark is awarded, a tick/check (

) must be placed in the text at the precise point w

here it becomes clear that the candidate deserves

the mark. O

ne tick to be shown for each m

ark awarded.

4. Som

etimes, careful consideration is required to decide w

hether or not to award a m

ark. In these cases use RM

™ Assessor annotations to support

your decision. You are encouraged to write com

ments w

here it helps clarity, especially for re-marking purposes. U

se a text box for these additional com

ments. It should be rem

embered that the script m

ay be returned to the candidate. Please do not allow these annotations to obscure

the written m

aterial. Try to keep these to the margin of the scan as far as possible. (Ticks should how

ever be at the point of award, cf 4.)

5. Personal codes/notations are unacceptable.

6. W

here an answer to a part question is w

orth no marks but the candidate has attem

pted the part question, use the “ZERO

” annotation to award

zero marks. W

here a candidate has not attempted the part question, use the “SEEN

” annotation to show you have looked at the question.

RM

™ Assessor w

ill apply “NR

” once you click complete.

7. Ensure that you have view

ed every page including any additional sheets. Please ensure that you stamp “SEEN

” on any additional pages that contain w

ork not related to the QIG

you are currently marking, or are blank or w

here the candidate has crossed out his/her work.

8. M

ark positively. Give candidates credit for w

hat they have achieved and for what they have got correct, rather than penalizing them

for what they

have got wrong. H

owever, a m

ark should not be awarded w

here there is contradiction within an answ

er. Make a com

ment to this effect using a

text box or the “CO

N” stam

p.

Assistant Examiners (AEs) w

ill be contacted by their team leader (TL) through R

M™

Assessor, by e-mail or telephone – if through R

M™

Assessor or by e-m

ail, please reply to confirm that you have dow

nloaded the markschem

e from IBIS. The purpose of this initial contact is to allow

AEs to raise any queries they have regarding the m

arkscheme and its interpretation. AEs should contact their team

leader through RM

™ Assessor or by e-m

ail at any tim

e if they have any problems/queries regarding m

arking. For any queries regarding the use of RM

™ Assessor, please contact

emarking@

ibo.org.

– 4 – N

16/4/PHYSI/SP2/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

Subject D

etails: Physics SL Paper 2 Markschem

e C

andidates are required to answer all questions. M

aximum

total

50 m

arks. 1.

Each row in the “Q

uestion” column relates to the sm

allest subpart of the question. 2.

The maxim

um m

ark for each question subpart is indicated in the “Total” column.

3. Each m

arking point in the “Answers” colum

n is shown by m

eans of a tick () at the end of the m

arking point. 4.

A question subpart may have m

ore marking points than the total allow

s. This will be indicated by “m

ax” written after the m

ark in the “Total” column.

The related rubric, if necessary, will be outlined in the “N

otes” column.

5. An alternative w

ording is indicated in the “Answers” colum

n by a slash (/). Either wording can be accepted.

6. An alternative answ

er is indicated in the “Answers” colum

n by “OR

”. Either answer can be accepted.

7. An alternative m

arkscheme is indicated in the “Answ

ers” column under heading A

LTERN

ATIVE 1 etc. Either alternative can be accepted.

8. W

ords inside chevrons « » in the “Answers” colum

n are not necessary to gain the mark.

9. W

ords that are underlined are essential for the mark.

10. The order of m

arking points does not have to be as in the “Answers” colum

n, unless stated otherwise in the “N

otes” column.

11. If the candidate’s answ

er has the same “m

eaning” or can be clearly interpreted as being of equivalent significance, detail and validity as that in the “Answ

ers” column then aw

ard the mark. W

here this point is considered to be particularly relevant in a question it is emphasized by O

WTTE

(or words to that effect) in the “N

otes” column.

12. R

emem

ber that many candidates are w

riting in a second language. Effective comm

unication is more im

portant than gramm

atical accuracy. 13.

Occasionally, a part of a question m

ay require an answer that is required for subsequent m

arking points. If an error is made in the first m

arking point then it should be penalized. H

owever, if the incorrect answ

er is used correctly in subsequent marking points then follow

through marks should

be awarded. W

hen marking, indicate this by adding EC

F (error carried forward) on the script. “EC

F acceptable” will be displayed in the “N

otes” column.

14. D

o not penalize candidates for errors in units or significant figures, unless it is specifically referred to in the “Notes” colum

n.

– 5 – N

16/4/PHYSI/SP2/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

Question

Answers

Notes

Total

1. a

determ

ines component correctly / 15 sin 50 seen

A

llow m

ethod via v=

u +at. A

llow use of g

210

ms

, −=

gives 6.6 m

and 8.1 m.

3

(15sin50)²

6.7m

29.81

s=

=×

«»

«»

Allow

[2 max] for use of 15 cos 50, gives 4.7 m

and 6.2 m.

correct reasoning consistent w

ith candidate data

Allow

[1 max] (as M

P2) if 13 m

is obtained due to use of 1

15m

s−

rather than 15 sin or 15 cos 50. If no unit given, assum

e metre.

b

i ×

==

(0.05815)

38N

OR

37.8N

0.023F

«»

«»

«»

Do not penalise sf here. W

orking not required. 1

b

ii force of ball on racket is equal to force of racket on ball or is 38 N

Do not accept “sam

e force”. A

llow E

CF from

force value in bi

2

ball exerts force in opposite direction to force of racket on ball

A

ccept “opposite force” for “in opposite direction”. D

o not accept undefined references to “reaction” the direction of the forces m

ust be clear.

– 6 – N

16/4/PHYSI/SP2/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

Question

Answers

Notes

Total

2. a

evidence that area under graph used

OR

use of mean velocity ×

time

Aw

ard [2] for a bald correct answer.

2

–1

29.82

3.41m

s17.5 ×

=«

»«

»

A

ward [1] for

11.70

ms

−.

b

i «deceleration»

−=

23.41

0.243m

s14.0

OR

«»

Aw


Aw

ard [1 max] for use of first 3.5 s.

Allow

EC

F from 2(a).

Ignore slight rounding errors 2

F =

«0.243 ×20

=» 4.87 «N

»

b

ii A

LTERN

ATIVE 1

2

calculates KE using

212

mv

Allow

EC

F from (a).

116 J

A

ward [2] for a bald correct answ

er.

A

LTERN

ATIVE 2

calculates distance as 23.9 «m

»

Allow

EC

F from (a).

4.86

23.90

×=

«»

116 J

Allow

EC

F from (a) and (b)(i)

Aw


Aw

ard [1 max] for use of first 3.5 s

Unit is required for M

P2

– 7 – N

16/4/PHYSI/SP2/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

Question

Answers

Notes

Total

3. a

m

ention of atoms/m

olecules/particles

2

sum/total of kinetic energy and «m

utual/intermolecular» potential

energy

Do not allow

“kinetic energy and potential energy” bald.

Do not allow

“sum of average ke and pe” unless

clearly referring to total ensemble.

b

i «interm

olecular» potential energy/PE of an ideal gas is zero/negligible

1

b

ii TH

IS IS FOR

USE W

ITH AN

ENG

LISH SC

RIPT O

NLY

use of =

TPVnR

or ..

.×

=×

14

21T

046

831

Award m

ark for correct re-arrangement as show

n here not for quotation of D

ata Booklet version.

Award [2] for a bald correct answ

er in K. Aw

ard [2 max] if correct 7.7 K seen follow

ed by –265°C

and mark BO

D. H

owever, if only –265°C

seen, aw

ard [1 max].

2

7.7 K

D

o not penalise use of “°K”

b

ii TH

IS IS FOR

USE W

ITH A SPAN

ISH SC

RIPT O

NLY

=T

PVnR

.

..

.

−×

×=

×

61

42

110

T0

468

31

T = 7.7 ×10-6 K

Aw

ard mark for correct re-arrangem

ent as shown

here not for quotation of Data B

ooklet version. U

ses correct unit conversion for volume

Award [2] for a bald correct answ

er in K. Finds solution. A

llow an E

CF from

MP

2 if unit not converted, ie candidate uses 21 m

3 and obtains 7.7 K

D

o not penalise use of “°K”

2 max

– 8 – N

16/4/PHYSI/SP2/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

Question

Answers

Notes

Total

b

iii m

odels used to predict/hypothesize

explain

simulate

sim

plify/approximate

Allow

similar responses w

hich have equivalent m

eanings. Response needs to identify one

reason. 1 m

ax

– 9 – N

16/4/PHYSI/SP2/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

Question

Answers

Notes

Total

4. a

charge: –1«e» or negative or K

−

Negative signs required.

1

b

2

correct sym

bols for both missing quarks

exchange particle and electron labelled W

or W – and e or e

–

Do not allow

W + or e

+ or β+ A

llow β or β

–

– 10 – N

16/4/PHYSI/SP2/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

Question

Answers

Notes

Total

c

decay products include an electron that has m

ass O

R

products have energy that has a mass equivalent

OR

m

ass/mass defect/binding energy converted to m

ass/energy of decay products

2

«so» m

ass C-14

>m

ass N-14

OR

m

ass of n>

mass of p

OR

m

ass of d>

mass of u

Accept reference to “lighter” and “heavier” in

mass.

Do not accept im

plied comparison, eg “C

-14 has greater m

ass”. Com

parison must be explicit as

stated in scheme.

– 11 – N

16/4/PHYSI/SP2/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

Question

Answers

Notes

Total

5. a

i m

inima

=destructive interference

A

llow “crest m

eets trough”, but not “waves

cancel”. A

llow “destructive superposition” but not bald

“superposition”.

2

at m

inima w

aves meet 180

πor

out of phase

Allow

similar argum

ent in terms of effective path

difference of 2 λ.

Allow

“antiphase”, allow “com

pletely out of phase” D

o not allow “out of phase” w

ithout angle.

Do not allow

2 n λ

unless qualified to odd integers

but accept 1

()2

nλ

+

a

ii sdD

λ=

or λ×

×=

=12

27.2

54 or λ

×=

=12

7.254

seen

Aw


2

λ×

×=

=12

27.2

53.2

cm4

»«

«»

Aw

ard [1 max] for 1.6 «cm

» A

ward [2 m

ax] to a trigonometric solution in

which candidate w

orks out individual path

lengths and equates to 2 λ .

– 12 – N

16/4/PHYSI/SP2/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

Question

Answers

Notes

Total

b

A

LTERN

ATIVE 1

2

the com

ponent of the polarized signal in the direction of the receiving antenna

is a m

aximum

«when both are parallel»

ALTER

NA

TIVE 2 receiving antenna m

ust be parallel to plane of polarisation

for power/intensity to be m

aximum

Do not accept “receiving antenna m

ust be parallel to transm

itting antenna”

A

LTERN

ATIVE 3

refers to M

alus’ law or

20 cos

θ=

II

explains that I is m

ax when

0θ

=

A

LTERN

ATIVE 4

an electric current is established in the receiving antenna w

hich is proportional to the electric field

m

aximum

current in receiving antenna requires maxim

um field «and so

must be parallel»

– 13 – N

16/4/PHYSI/SP2/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

Question

Answers

Notes

Total

c

i 0

22

12=

coscos

30I

Iθ

or seen

A

ward [2] for bald correct answ

er. A

ward [1 m

ax] for MP

1 if 9 x 10-6 W

is the final answ

er (I and 0

I reversed).

Aw

ard [1 max] if cos not squared (14 µW

). 2

−

×5

1.610

W«

»

U

nits not required but if absent assume W

.

c

ii –4

1.910

s×

«»

1

6. a

i «gravitational» force per unit m

ass on a «small or test» m

ass

1

a

ii N

kg–1

A

ward m

ark if N kg

-1 is seen, treating any further work

as neutral. D

o not accept bald m s –2

1

– 14 – N

16/4/PHYSI/SP2/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

Question

Answers

Notes

Total

b

i clear evidence that v in

22

22

4R

T π=

v is equated to orbital

speed G

MR

OR

clear evidence that centripetal force is equated to gravitational force O

R

clear evidence that a in 2

aR

=v

etc is equated to g in

2G

MRg

= w

ith consistent use of symbols

Minim

um is a statem

ent thatG

MRis the orbital speed w

hich

is then used in 2

RT π

=v

Minim

um is F

c = Fg ignore any signs.

Minim

um is g = a.

2

substitutes and re-arranges to obtain result

«

==

ππ

22

3

2

44

RR

TG

MG

MR

»

Allow

any legitimate m

ethod not identified here. D

o not allow spurious m

ethods involving equations of shm etc

– 15 – N

16/4/PHYSI/SP2/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

Question

Answers

Notes

Total

b

ii «

7365

2460

603.15

10s

T=

××

×=

×»

−

××

×=

==

××

×π

32

113

211

72

24

43.14

(1.510

)6.67

10(3.15

10)

RM

GT

«»

2 ×

302

10kg

«»

Allow

use of 3.16 x 107 s for year length (quoted elsew

here in paper). C

ondone error in power of ten in M

P1.

Aw

ard [1 max] if incorrect tim

e used (24 h is sometim

es seen, leading to 2.66 x 10

35 kg). U

nits are not required, but if not given assume kg and m

ark P

OT accordingly if pow

er wrong.

Aw


No sf penalty here.

– 16 – N

16/4/PHYSI/SP2/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

Question

Answers

Notes

Total

7. a

i R

T decreases with increasing I

OR

RT and I are negatively correlated

Must see reference to direction of change of current in first

alternative. D

o not allow “inverse proportionality”.

May be w

orth noting any marks on graph relating to 7bii.

1

a

ii at 0.4 A:

RT

VV

> or V

R = 5.6 V and VT = 5.3 V

A

ward [0] for a bald correct answ

er without deduction or w

ith incorrect reasoning. Ignore any references to graph gradients.

2

so R

TR

R>

because V=

IR / V

∝ R

«and I same for

both»

Both elem

ents must be present for M

P2 to be aw

arded.

b

i decreases

OR

becomes zero at X

1

b

ii realization that V is the sam

e for R and T

OR

identifies that currents are 0.14 A and 0.06 A

Aw

ard [0] if pds 2.8 V and 3.7 V

or 1.4 V and 2.6 V are used

in any way. O

therwise aw

ard [1 max] for a bald correct

answer. E

xplanation expected. 2

V

=2 V O

R 2.0 V

– 17 – N

16/4/PHYSI/SP2/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

Question

Answers

Notes

Total

8. a

55.5

14.60.59

××

=«

»4.78 x 10

8 W

A

unit is required for this mark. A

llow use of J s

-1. N

o sf penalty. 1

b

7

914.6

2.753.16

101.27

10kg

××

×=

×«

»«

»

If no unit assum

e kg. 1

c

C

O2 linked to greenhouse gas O

R greenhouse effect

2

leading to «enhanced» global w

arming

OR

climate change

OR

other reasonable climatic effect

d

internal energy of steam

/particles OR

KE of steam

/particles

«transfers to» KE of turbine

«transfers to» KE of generator or dynamo «producing

electrical energy»

Do not aw

ard mark for first and last energies as they are given

in the question. D

o not allow “gas” for “steam

”. D

o not accept reference to moving O

R turning generator.

2 max

32EP01



1 hour

Wednesday 9 November 2016 (morning)Candidate session number



• Write your session number in the boxes above.• Do not open this examination paper until instructed to do so.• Write your answers in the boxes provided.• A calculator is required for this paper.• A clean copy of the physics data booklet is required for this paper.• The maximum mark for this examination paper is [35 marks].

Section A Questions

Answer all questions. 1 – 3

Option Questions

Answer all of the questions from one of the options.

Option A — Relativity 4 – 7

Option B — Engineering physics 8 – 10

Option C — Imaging 11 – 14

Option D — Astrophysics 15 – 17

8816 – 6506


32EP02

– 2 –

Section A


1. A student measures the refractive index of water by shining a light ray into a transparent container.

IO shows the direction of the normal at the point where the light is incident on the container. IX shows the direction of the light ray when the container is empty. IY shows the direction of the deviated light ray when the container is filled with water.

The angle of incidence is varied and the student determines the position of O, X and Y for each angle of incidence.

light ray

I

O

Y

X

(top view)



32EP03

– 3 –

Turn over


The table shows the data collected by the student. The uncertainty in each measurement of length is 0.1 cm.

OX / cm OY / cm

1.8 1.3

3.6 2.6

5.8 4.0

8.4 5.5

11.9 7.3

17.3 9.5

27.4 12.2

(a) (i) Outline why OY has a greater percentage uncertainty than OX for each pair of data points. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) The refractive index of the water is given by OXOY

when OX is small.

Calculate the fractional uncertainty in the value of the refractive index of water for OX = 1.8 cm. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



32EP04

– 4 –


(b) A graph of the variation of OY with OX is plotted.

OY / cm

8.0

7.0

6.0

5.0

4.0

3.0

2.0

1.0

0.0 0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0

OX / cm

(i) Draw, on the graph, the error bars for OY when OX = 1.8 cm and when OY = 5.8 cm. [1]

(ii) Determine, using the graph, the refractive index of the water in the container for values of OX less than 6.0 cm. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



32EP05

– 5 –

Turn over


(iii) The refractive index for a material is also given by sinsinir

where i is the angle of incidence and r is the angle of refraction.

Outline why the graph on page 4 deviates from a straight line for large values of OX. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


32EP06

– 6 –

2. An apparatus is used to verify a gas law. The glass jar contains a fixed volume of air. Measurements can be taken using the thermometer and the pressure gauge.

thermometer

pressure gauge

glass jar

The apparatus is cooled in a freezer and then placed in a water bath so that the temperature of the gas increases slowly. The pressure and temperature of the gas are recorded.



32EP07

– 7 –

Turn over


(a) The graph shows the data recorded.

pressure / 105 Pa

4.0

3.5

3.0

2.5

2.0

1.5

1.0

0.5

0.0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400

temperature / K

Identify the fundamental SI unit for the gradient of the pressure–temperature graph. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The experiment is repeated using a different gas in the glass jar. The pressure for both experiments is low and both gases can be considered to be ideal.

(i) Using the axes provided in (a), draw the expected graph for this second experiment. [1]

(ii) Explain the shape and intercept of the graph you drew in (b)(i). [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


32EP08

– 8 –




32EP09

– 9 –

Turn over

3. A student pours a canned carbonated drink into a cylindrical container after shaking the can violently before opening. A large volume of foam is produced that fills the container. The graph shows the variation of foam height with time.

foam height / cm

40

35

30

25

20

15

10

5

0 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

time / s

(a) Determine the time taken for the foam to drop to

(i) half its initial height. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) a quarter of its initial height. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The change in foam height can be modelled using ideas from other areas of physics. Identify one other situation in physics that is modelled in a similar way. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


32EP10

– 10 –

Section B

Answer all of the questions from one of the options. Write your answers in the boxes provided.

Option A — Relativity

4. An electron X is moving parallel to a current-carrying wire. The positive ions and the wire are fixed in the reference frame of the laboratory. The drift speed of the free electrons in the wire is the same as the speed of the external electron X.

v

ion

free electron

X

drift speed of free electrons

(a) Define frame of reference. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



32EP11

– 11 –

Turn over


(b) In the reference frame of the laboratory the force on X is magnetic.

(i) State the nature of the force acting on X in this reference frame where X is at rest. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Explain how this force arises. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



32EP12

– 12 –


5. (a) Define proper length. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) A charged pion decays spontaneously in a time of 26 ns as measured in the frame of reference in which it is stationary. The pion moves with a velocity of 0.96c relative to the Earth. Calculate the pion’s lifetime as measured by an observer on the Earth. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) In the pion reference frame, the Earth moves a distance X before the pion decays. In the Earth reference frame, the pion moves a distance Y before the pion decays. Demonstrate, with calculations, how length contraction applies to this situation. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



32EP13

– 13 –

Turn over


6. A spaceship S leaves the Earth with a speed v = 0.80c. The spacetime diagram for the Earth is shown. A clock on the Earth and a clock on the spaceship are synchronized at the origin of the spacetime diagram.

ct

45°

Z

S

x

(a) Calculate the angle between the worldline of S and the worldline of the Earth. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Draw, on the diagram, the ′x -axis for the reference frame of S. [1]

(c) An event Z is shown on the diagram. Label the co-ordinates of this event in the reference frame of S. [1]



32EP14

– 14 –


7. Identical twins, A and B, are initially on Earth. Twin A remains on Earth while twin B leaves the Earth at a speed of 0.6c for a return journey to a point three light years from Earth.

(a) Calculate the time taken for the journey in the reference frame of twin A as measured on Earth. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Determine the time taken for the journey in the reference frame of twin B. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) Draw, for the reference frame of twin A, a spacetime diagram that represents the worldlines for both twins. [1]



32EP15

– 15 –

Turn over


(d) Suggest how the twin paradox arises and how it is resolved. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

End of Option A


32EP16

– 16 –

Option B — Engineering physics

8. A flywheel consists of a solid cylinder, with a small radial axle protruding from its centre.

small radial axle

R r

string

m

flywheel

The following data are available for the flywheel.

Flywheel mass M = 1.22 kg Small axle radius r = 60.0 mm Flywheel radius R = 240 mm Moment of inertia = 0.5 MR2

An object of mass m is connected to the axle by a light string and allowed to fall vertically from rest, exerting a torque on the flywheel.

(a) The velocity of the falling object is 1.89 m s–1 at 3.98 s. Calculate the average angular acceleration of the flywheel. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Show that the torque acting on the flywheel is about 0.3 Nm. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



32EP17

– 17 –

Turn over


(c) (i) Calculate the tension in the string. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Determine the mass m of the falling object. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



32EP18

– 18 –


9. The diagram shows two methods of pedalling a bicycle using a force F.

Method 1 Method 2

crank arm crank arm

In method 1 the pedal is always horizontal to the ground. A student claims that method 2 is better because the pedal is always parallel to the crank arm. Explain why method 2 is more effective. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10. An ideal nuclear power plant can be modelled as a heat engine that operates between a hot temperature of 612 °C and a cold temperature of 349 °C.

(a) Calculate the Carnot efficiency of the nuclear power plant. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



32EP19

– 19 –

Turn over


(b) Explain, with a reason, why a real nuclear power plant operating between the stated temperatures cannot reach the efficiency calculated in (a). [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) The nuclear power plant works at 71.0 % of the Carnot efficiency. The power produced is 1.33 GW. Calculate how much waste thermal energy is released per hour. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(d) Discuss the production of waste heat by the power plant with reference to the first law and the second law of thermodynamics. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

End of Option B


32EP20

– 20 –




32EP21

– 21 –

Turn over

Option C — Imaging

11. Spherical converging mirrors are reflecting surfaces which are cut out of a sphere. The diagram shows a mirror, where the dot represents the centre of curvature of the mirror.

(a) A ray of light is incident on a converging mirror. On the diagram, draw the reflection of the incident ray shown. [2]

centre of curvature

incident ray

optical axis

(b) The incident ray shown in the diagram makes a significant angle with the optical axis.

(i) State the aberration produced by these kind of rays. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Outline how this aberration is overcome. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



32EP22

– 22 –


12. A lamp is located 6.0 m from a screen.

6.0 m

lamp screen

Somewhere between the lamp and the screen, a lens is placed so that it produces a real inverted image on the screen. The image produced is 4.0 times larger than the lamp.

(a) Identify the nature of the lens. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Determine the distance between the lamp and the lens. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) Calculate the focal length of the lens. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



32EP23

– 23 –

Turn over


(d) The lens is moved to a second position where the image on the screen is again focused. The lamp–screen distance does not change. Compare the characteristics of this new image with the original image. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



32EP24

– 24 –


13. Both optical refracting telescopes and compound microscopes consist of two converging lenses.

(a) Compare the focal lengths needed for the objective lens in an refracting telescope and in a compound microscope. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) A student has four converging lenses of focal length 5, 20, 150 and 500 mm. Determine the maximum magnification that can be obtained with a refracting telescope using two of the lenses. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) There are optical telescopes which have diameters about 10 m. There are radio telescopes with single dishes of diameters at least 10 times greater.

(i) Discuss why, for the same number of incident photons per unit area, radio telescopes need to be much larger than optical telescopes. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Outline how is it possible for radio telescopes to achieve diameters of the order of a thousand kilometres. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



32EP25

– 25 –

Turn over


(d) The diagram shows a schematic view of a compound microscope with the focal points fo of the objective lens and the focal points fe of the eyepiece lens marked on the axis.

fo fo fe fe

objective lens eyepiece lens

On the diagram, identify with an X, a suitable position for the image formed by the objective of the compound microscope. [1]

(e) Image 1 shows details on the petals of a flower under visible light. Image 2 shows the same flower under ultraviolet light. The magnification is the same, but the resolution is higher in Image 2.

Image 1 Image 2

Explain why an ultraviolet microscope can increase the resolution of a compound microscope. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Option C continues on page 27)


32EP26

– 26 –




32EP27

– 27 –

Turn over

(Option C continued from page 25)

14. Optical fibres can be classified, based on the way the light travels through them, as single-mode or multimode fibres. Multimode fibres can be classified as step-index or graded-index fibres.

(a) State the main physical difference between step-index and graded-index fibres. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Explain why graded-index fibres help reduce waveguide dispersion. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

End of Option C


32EP28

– 28 –

Option D — Astrophysics

15. Alpha Centauri A and B is a binary star system in the main sequence.

Alpha Centauri A Alpha Centauri B

Luminosity 1.5L 0.5L

Surface temperature / K 5800 5300

(a) State what is meant by a binary star system. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) (i) Calculate bb

A

B

apparent brightness of Alpha Centauri Aapparent brig

=

hhtness of Alpha Centauri B. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) The luminosity of the Sun is 3.8 × 1026 W. Calculate the radius of Alpha Centauri A. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



32EP29

– 29 –

Turn over


(c) Show, without calculation, that the radius of Alpha Centauri B is smaller than the radius of Alpha Centauri A. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(d) Alpha Centauri A is in equilibrium at constant radius. Explain how this equilibrium is maintained. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



32EP30

– 30 –


(e) A standard Hertzsprung–Russell (HR) diagram is shown.

LLstar

106

104

102

100

10–2

10–4

Sun

40 000 20 000 10 000 5000 2500

temperature / K

Using the HR diagram, draw the present position of Alpha Centauri A and its expected evolutionary path. [2]



32EP31

– 31 –

Turn over


16. The first graph shows the variation of apparent brightness of a Cepheid star with time.

apparent brightness

A

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22

time / days

The second graph shows the average luminosity with period for Cepheid stars.

luminosity / solar

luminosities

100 000

20 00010 000

20001000

200100

1 2 5 10 20 50 100

period / days

(a) Determine the distance from Earth to the Cepheid star in parsecs. The luminosity of the Sun is 3.8 × 1026 W. The average apparent brightness of the Cepheid star is 1.1 × 10–9 W m–2. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



32EP32

– 32 –


(b) Explain why Cephids are used as standard candles. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17. The peak wavelength of the cosmic microwave background (CMB) radiation spectrum corresponds to a temperature of 2.76 K.

(a) Identify two other characteristics of the CMB radiation that are predicted from the Hot Big Bang theory. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) A spectral line in the hydrogen spectrum measured in the laboratory today has a wavelength of 21 cm. Since the emission of the CMB radiation, the cosmic scale factor has changed by a factor of 1100. Determine the wavelength of the 21 cm spectral line in the CMB radiation when it is observed today. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

End of Option D




45 minutes

Tuesday 31 October 2017 (afternoon)




8817 – 6504

– 2 –

1. Howmanysignificantfiguresarethereinthenumber0.0450?

A. 2

B. 3

C. 4

D. 5

2. Anobjectispositionedinagravitationalfield.Themeasurementofgravitationalforceacting ontheobjecthasanuncertaintyof3%andtheuncertaintyinthemassoftheobjectis9%. Whatistheuncertaintyinthegravitationalfieldstrengthofthefield?

A. 3%

B. 6%

C. 12%

D. 27%

3. Thevariationofthedisplacementofanobjectwithtimeisshownonagraph.Whatdoesthe areaunderthegraphrepresent?

A. Nophysicalquantity

B. Velocity

C. Acceleration

D. Impulse


–3–

Turn over

4. Anobjectisthrownupwards.Thegraphshowsthevariationwithtimetofthevelocityvoftheobject.

v/m s–1

5.0

0.0

− 5.0

0.50.0 1.0 1.5t / s

Whatisthetotaldisplacementatatimeof1.5 s,measuredfromthepointofrelease?

A. 0 m

B. 1.25 m

C. 2.50 m

D. 3.75 m

5. Anobjectisreleasedfromastationaryhotairballoonatheighthabovetheground. Anidenticalobjectisreleasedatheighthabovethegroundfromanotherballoonthatisrising atconstantspeed.Airresistanceisnegligible.Whatdoesnotincreasefortheobjectreleasedfromtherisingballoon?

A. Thedistancethroughwhichitfalls

B. Thetimetakenforittoreachtheground

C. Thespeedwithwhichitreachestheground

D. Itsacceleration


–4–

6. Thediagramshowstheforcesactingonablockrestingonaninclinedplane.Theangleh is adjusteduntiltheblockisjustatthepointofsliding.Risthenormalreaction,WtheweightoftheblockandF themaximumfrictionalforce.

R

h

F

W nottoscale

Whatisthemaximumcoefficientofstaticfrictionbetweentheblockandtheplane?

A. sinh

B. cosh

C. tanh

D.1

tanq


– 5 –

Turn over

7. AsystemthatconsistsofasinglespringstoresatotalelasticpotentialenergyEpwhenaloadisaddedtothespring.Anotheridenticalspringconnectedinparallelisaddedtothesystem.Thesameloadisnowappliedtotheparallelsprings.

loadload

singlespring parallelsprings

Whatisthetotalelasticpotentialenergystoredinthechangedsystem?

A. Ep

B. p

2E

C. p

4E

D. p

8E

8. Amovingsystemundergoesanexplosion.Whatiscorrectforthemomentumofthesystemandthekineticenergyofthesystemwhentheyarecomparedimmediatelybeforeandaftertheexplosion?

Momentum Kinetic energy

A. conserved increased

B. conserved conserved

C. increased conserved

D. increased increased


–6–

9. WhatdoestheconstantnrepresentintheequationofstateforanidealgaspV = nRT ?

A. Thenumberofatomsinthegas

B. Thenumberofmolesofthegas

C. Thenumberofmoleculesofthegas

D. Thenumberofparticlesinthegas

10. A1.0 kWheatersuppliesenergytoaliquidofmass0.50 kg.Thetemperatureoftheliquidchangesby80 Kinatimeof200 s.Thespecificheatcapacityoftheliquidis4.0 kJ kg–1 K–1.Whatistheaveragepowerlostbytheliquid?

A. 0

B. 200 W

C. 800 W

D. 1600 W

11. Underwhatconditionsofpressureandtemperaturedoesarealgasapproximatetoanidealgas?

Pressure Temperature

A. high high

B. high low

C. low high

D. low low


–7–

Turn over

12. Thegraphshowsthevariationwithtimetofthevelocityvofanobjectundergoingsimpleharmonicmotion(SHM).Atwhichvelocitydoesthedisplacementfromthemeanpositiontakeamaximumpositivevalue?

v

0

A.

B.D.

C.

0 t

13. Whatisthephasedifference,inrad,betweenthecentreofacompressionandthecentreofararefactionforalongitudinaltravellingwave?

A. 0

B.2π

C. π

D. 2π


–8–

14. Twowavepulses,eachofamplitudeA,approacheachother.Theythensuperposebeforecontinuingintheiroriginaldirections.Whatisthetotalamplitudeduringsuperpositionandtheamplitudesoftheindividualpulsesaftersuperposition?

A

Total amplitude during superposition

Individual amplitudes after superposition

A. A lessthanA

B. A A

C. 2A lessthanA

D. 2A A

15. TherefractiveindexforlighttravellingfrommediumXtomediumYis43.Therefractiveindexfor

lighttravellingfrommediumYtomediumZis35.Whatistherefractiveindexforlighttravelling

frommediumXtomediumZ?

A. 45

B.

C. 54

D. 2915


–9–

Turn over

16. Apipeoffixedlengthisclosedatoneend.Whatisthird harmonic frequency of pipe first harmonic frequency of pipe ?

A. 15

B. 13

C. 3

D. 5

17. Inthecircuitshown,thefixedresistorhasavalueof3 andthevariableresistorcanbevariedbetween0 and9 .

12 V

3

0–9

V

Thepowersupplyhasanemfof12 Vandnegligibleinternalresistance.WhatisthedifferencebetweenthemaximumandminimumvaluesofvoltageVacrossthe3 resistor?

A. 3 V

B. 6 V

C. 9 V

D. 12 V


–10–

18. Kirchhoff’slawsareappliedtothecircuitshown.

6 V

I1

2

3

4

I2

I3

Whatistheequationforthedottedloop?

A. 0=3I2 + 4I3

B. 0=4I3 − 3I2

C. 6= 2I1 + 3I2 +4I3

D. 6=3I2 + 4I3

19. Withreferencetointernalenergyconversionandabilitytoberecharged,whatarethecharacteristicsofaprimarycell?

Internal energy conversion Ability to be recharged

A. chemicaltoelectrical rechargeable

B. chemicaltoelectrical notrechargeable

C. electricaltochemical rechargeable

D. electricaltochemical notrechargeable


– 11 –

Turn over

20. Thediagramshowstwocurrent-carryingwires,PandQ,thatbothlieintheplaneof thepaper.Thearrowsshowtheconventionalcurrentdirectioninthewires.

P

Q

TheelectromagneticforceonQisinthesameplaneasthatofthewires.WhatisthedirectionoftheelectromagneticforceactingonQ?

A.

D. B.

C.

21. Amassattachedtoastringrotatesinagravitationalfieldwithaconstantperiodinaverticalplane.

mass

P

Q

HowdothetensioninthestringandthekineticenergyofthemasscompareatPandQ?

Tension in the string Kinetic energy of mass

A. greateratPthanQ greateratQthanP

B. greateratQthanP greateratQthanP

C. greateratPthanQ sameatQandP

D. greateratQthanP sameatQandP


– 12 –

22. AsatelliteXofmassmorbitstheEarthwithaperiodT.WhatwillbetheorbitalperiodofsatelliteYofmass2moccupyingthesameorbitasX?

A.2T

B. T

C. 2T

D. 2T

23. Whichstatementaboutatomicspectraisnottrue?

A. Theyprovideevidencefordiscreteenergylevelsinatoms.

B. Emissionandabsorptionlinesofequalfrequencycorrespondtotransitionsbetweenthesametwoenergylevels.

C. Absorptionlinesarisewhenelectronsgainenergy.

D. Emissionlinesalwayscorrespondtothevisiblepartoftheelectromagneticspectrum.

24. Whatgivesthetotalchangeinnuclearmassandthechangeinnuclearbindingenergyasaresultofanuclearfusionreaction?

Nuclear mass Nuclear binding energy

A. decreases decreases

B. decreases increases

C. increases decreases

D. increases increases


–13–

Turn over

25. TheFeynmandiagramshowsaparticleinteractioninvolvingaW –boson.

time

U

X

W – Z

Y

Whichparticlesareinteracting?

A. UandY

B. W –bosonandY

C. XandY

D. UandX

26. Whichoftheenergysourcesareclassifiedasrenewableandnon-renewable?

Renewable Non-renewable

A. Sun wind

B. naturalgas geothermal

C. biomass crudeoil

D. uranium-235 coal

27. The energydensityofasubstancecanbecalculatedbymultiplyingitsspecificenergywithwhichquantity?

A. mass

B. volume

C. massvolume

D. volumemass


–14–

28. Ablackbodyemitsradiationwithitsgreatestintensityatawavelengthof maxl .Thesurfacetemperatureoftheblackbodydoubleswithoutanyotherchangeoccurring.Whatisthewavelengthatwhichthegreatestintensityofradiationisemitted?

A. maxl

B. max

2l

C. max

4l

D. max

16l

29. Thethreestatementsgivepossiblereasonswhyanaveragevalueshouldbeusedforthesolarconstant.

I. TheSun’soutputvariesduringits11yearcycle. II. TheEarthisinellipticalorbitaroundtheSun. III. TheplaneoftheEarth’sspinonitsaxisistiltedtotheplaneofitsorbitabouttheSun.

Whicharethecorrectreasonsforusinganaveragevalueforthesolarconstant?

A. IandIIonly

B. IandIIIonly

C. IIandIIIonly

D. I,IIandIII


– 15 –

30. Thediagramshowsananaloguemeterwithamirrorbehindthepointer.

02

4 68

10mA mA

mirrorpointer

Whatisthemainpurposeofthemirror?

A. Toprovideextralightwhenreadingthescale

B. Toreducetheriskofparallaxerrorwhenreadingthescale

C. Toenablethepointertobeseenfromdifferentangles

D. Tomagnifytheimageofthepointer


12EP01



1 hour 15 minutes

Tuesday 31 October 2017 (afternoon)Candidate session number



• Write your session number in the boxes above.• Do not open this examination paper until instructed to do so.• Answer all questions.• Answers must be written within the answer boxes provided.• A calculator is required for this paper.• A clean copy of the physics data booklet is required for this paper.• The maximum mark for this examination paper is [50 marks].

8817 – 6505


12EP02

– 2 –

Answer all questions. Answers must be written within the answer boxes provided.

1. A girl on a sledge is moving down a snow slope at a uniform speed.

sledge

snow slope horizontal region of snow

(a) Draw the free-body diagram for the sledge at the position shown on the snow slope. [2]

(b) After leaving the snow slope, the girl on the sledge moves over a horizontal region of snow. Explain, with reference to the physical origin of the forces, why the vertical forces on the girl must be in equilibrium as she moves over the horizontal region. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



12EP03

– 3 –

Turn over


(c) Whenthesledgeismovingonthehorizontalregionofthesnow,thegirljumpsoffthe sledge. The girl has no horizontal velocity after the jump. The velocity of the sledgeimmediatelyafterthegirljumpsoffis4.2 m s–1. The mass of the girl is 55 kg and the mass of the sledge is 5.5 kg. Calculate the speed of the sledge immediately before the girl jumps from it. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(d) The girl chooses to jump so that she lands on loosely-packed snow rather than frozen ice. Outline why she chooses to land on the snow. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



12EP04

–4–


(e) The sledge, without the girl on it, now travels up a snow slope that makes an angle of 6.5˚ to the horizontal. At the start of the slope, the speedofthesledgeis4.2 m s–1. The coefficientofdynamicfrictionofthesledgeonthesnowis 0.11.

(i) Show that the acceleration of the sledge is about –2 m s–2. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Calculate the distance along the slope at which the sledge stops moving. Assumethatthecoefficientofdynamicfrictionisconstant. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(f) Thecoefficientofstaticfrictionbetweenthesledgeandthesnowis0.14.Outline,witha calculation, the subsequent motion of the sledge. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


12EP05

– 5 –

Turn over

2. The Feynman diagram shows electron capture.

time

n

p

W +

X

e–

(a) Deduce that X must be an electron neutrino. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Distinguish between hadrons and leptons. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


12EP06

– 6 –

3. Electricalresistorscanbemadebyformingathinfilmof carbon on a layer of an insulating material.

(a) Acarbonfilmresistorismadefromafilmofwidth8.0 mm and of thickness 2.0 µm. The diagram shows the direction of charge flowthroughtheresistor.

resistor l

8.0 mm

2.0 µm

chargeflow

not to scale

(i) Theresistanceofthecarbonfilmis82Ω. The resistivity of carbon is 4.1 10–5 Ω m. Calculate the length lofthefilm. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Thefilmmustdissipateapowerlessthan1500 W from each square metre of its surface to avoid damage. Calculate the maximum allowable current for the resistor. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) State why knowledge of quantities such as resistivity is useful to scientists. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



12EP07

– 7 –

Turn over


(b) The currentdirectionisnowchangedsothatchargeflowsverticallythroughthefilm.

chargeflow

not to scale

Deduce, without calculation, the change in the resistance. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) Draw a circuit diagram to show how you could measure the resistance of the carbon-filmresistor using a potential divider arrangement to limit the potential differenceacrosstheresistor. [2]


12EP08

–8–

4. (a) A large cube is formed from ice. A light ray is incident from a vacuum at an angle of46˚ to the normal on one surface of the cube. The light ray is parallel to the plane of one of the sides of the cube. The angle of refraction inside the cube is 33˚.

A B

46˚ 33˚

ice cube

(i) Calculate the speed of light inside the ice cube. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Show that no light emerges from side AB. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) Sketch, on the diagram, the subsequent path of the light ray. [2]



12EP09

– 9 –

Turn over


(b) Each side of the ice cube is 0.75 m in length. The initial temperature of the ice cube is –20 C.

(i) Determine the energy required to melt all of the ice from –20 C to water at a temperature of 0 C.

Specificlatentheatoffusionofice = 330 kJ kg–1

Specificheatcapacityofice = 2.1 kJ kg–1 K–1

Density of ice = 920 kg m–3

[4]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Outlinethedifferencebetweenthemolecularstructureofasolidandaliquid. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


12EP10

– 10 –

5. A satellite powered by solar cells directed towards the Sun is in a polar orbit about the Earth.

satellite

The satellite is orbiting the Earth at a distance of 6600 km from the centre of the Earth.

(a) Determine the orbital period for the satellite.

Mass of Earth = 6.0 1024 kg

[3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



12EP11

– 11 –

Turn over


(b) The satellite carries an experiment that measures the peak wavelength emitted by differentobjects. The Sun emits radiation that has a peak wavelength S of 509 nm. The peak wavelength E of the radiation emitted by the Earth is 10.1 µm.

(i) Determine the mean temperature of the Earth. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Suggesthowthedifferencebetween S and E helps to account for the greenhouseeffect. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) Not all scientists agree that global warming is caused by the activities of man. Outline how scientiststrytoensureagreementonascientificissue. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12EP12



N17/4/PH

YSI/SP2/ENG

/TZ0/XX/M

12 pages

Markschem

e

Novem

ber 2017

Physics

Standard level

Paper 2

–2 –

N17/4/PH

YSI/SP2/ENG

/TZ0/XX/M

This markschem



ithout the authorization of the IB Global C

entre, C

ardiff.

– 3 –N

17/4/PHYSI/SP2/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

Question

Answers

Notes

Total 1.

a arrow

vertically downw

ards labelled weight «of sledge and/or

girl»/W/m

g/gravitational force/Fg /F

gravitational AN

D arrow

perpendicular to the snow

slope labelled reaction force/R/norm

al contact force/N/F

N

Do not allow

G/g/“gravity”.

Do not aw

ard MP

1 if a “driving force” is included. A

llow com

ponents of weight if correctly labelled.

Ignore point of application or shape of object.

Ignore “air resistance”.

Ignore any reference to “push of feet on sledge”.

Do not aw

ard MP

2 for forces on sledge on horizontal ground

The arrows should contact the object

2

friction force/F/f acting up slope «perpendicular to reaction force»

1. b

gravitational force/weight from

the Earth «downw

ards»

Allow

naming of forces as in (a)

3 reaction force from

the sledge/snow/ground «upw

ards»

no vertical acceleration/remains in contact w

ith the ground/does not m

ove vertically as there is no resultant vertical force

Allow

vertical forces are balanced/equal in m

agnitude/cancel out

1. c

mention of conservation of m

omentum

O

R ×

=+

5.54.2

(555.5)

v«

»

2

−10.38

ms

«»

Allow

=

pp ′ or other algebraically equivalent

statement

Award [0] for answ

ers based on energy

(continued…)

– 4 –N

17/4/PHYSI/SP2/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M


Question

Answers

Notes

Total 1.

d sam

e change in mom

entum/im

pulse

3

the time taken «to stop» w

ould be greater «with the snow

»

Allow

reverse argument for ice

pF

t∆

=∆

therefore F is smaller «w

ith the snow»

OR

force is proportional to rate of change of m

omentum

therefore F is sm

aller «with the snow»

1. e

i «friction force dow

n slope»µ

==

cos(6.5)5.9N

mg

«»

3 «com

ponent of weight dow

n slope»sin(6.5)

6.1Nm

g=

=«

»

«so a

Fm

=»

acceleration2

122.2

ms

5.5−

==

«»

Ignore negative signs

Allow

use of g =10 m

s–2

1. e

ii

correct use of kinematics equation

A

llow E

CF from

(e)(i)

Allow [1 m

ax] for GPE m

issing leading to 8.2 «m»

2 distance

4.44.0

m=

«»

or

Alternative 2

KE lost=w

ork done against friction+

GPE

distance4.4

4.0m

=«

»or

(continued…)

– 5 –N

17/4/PHYSI/SP2/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M


Question

Answers

Notes

Total 1.

f calculates a m

aximum

value for the frictional force7.5

NR

µ=

=«

»«

»

2 sledge w

ill not move as the m

aximum

static friction force is greater than the com

ponent of weight dow

n the slope

Allow

correct conclusion from incorrect M

P1

Allow

7.5 > 6.1 so will not m

ove

–6 –

N17/4/PH

YSI/SP2/ENG

/TZ0/XX/M

Question

Answers

Notes

Total 2.

a 2

it has a lepton number of 1 «as lepton num

ber is conserved»

it has a charge of zero/is neutral «as charge is conserved» O

R

it has a baryon number of 0 «as baryon num

ber is conserved»

Do not credit answ

ers referring to energy

2. b

hadrons experience strong force O

R

leptons do not experience the strong force

Accept leptons experience the w

eak force

Allow

“interaction” for “force”

2 max

hadrons made of quarks/not fundam

ental O

R

leptons are not made of quarks/are fundam

ental

hadrons decay «eventually» into protons O

R

leptons do not decay into protons

– 7 –N

17/4/PHYSI/SP2/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

Question

Answers

Notes

Total 3.

a i

« 3

6

582

810

210

4.110

RAρ

−−

−

××

××

==

×»

l1

0.032 «m»

3. a

ii pow

er3

15008

100.032

0.384−

=×

××

=«

»

2 «current

power

0.384resistance

82≤

=»

0.068 «A»

Aw

ard [1] for 4.3 «A» where candidate has not

calculated area

3. a

iii quantities such as resistivity depend on the m

aterial O

R

they allow the selection of the correct m

aterial O

R

they allow scientists to com

pare properties of materials

1

3. b

as area is larger and length is smaller

A

ward [1 m

ax] for answers that involve a calculation

2 resistance is «very m

uch» smaller

(continued…)

– 8 –N

17/4/PHYSI/SP2/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M


Question

Answers

Notes

Total 3.

c com

plete functional circuit with am

meter in series w

ith resistor and voltm

eter across it

eg:

2

potential divider arrangement correct

– 9 –N

17/4/PHYSI/SP2/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

Question

Answers

Notes

Total 4.

a i

8sin

310

sin(33)sin

sin(46)i

vc

r×

×=

=«

»

2

81

2.310

ms−

×«

»

4. a

ii light strikes AB at an angle of 57

3 max

critical angle is 1

2.3sin

50.13

−

=

«»

49.2

from unrounded value

angle of incidence is greater than critical angle so total internal reflection O

R

light strikes AB at an angle of 57

calculation showing sin of “refracted angle” =

1.1

statement that since 1.1

>1 the angle does not exist and the light does

not emerge

4. a

iii total internal reflection show

n

Judge angle of incidence=

angle of reflection by eye or accept correctly labelled angles

2 ray em

erges at opposite face to incidence

With sensible refraction in correct direction

(c ontinued…)

– 10 –N

17/4/PHYSI/SP2/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M


Question

Answers

Notes

Total 4.

b i

mass

3(0.75)

920388kg

volume

density=

××

=«

»«

»

4 energy required to raise tem

perature7

3882100

201.63

10J

=×

×=

×«

»

energy required to melt

38

388330

101.28

10J

=×

×=

×«

»

Accept any consistent units

Aw

ard [3 max] for answ

er which uses density

as 1000 kg–3 (1.5

× 108 «J»)

×8

1.410

J«

» O

R 5

1.410

kJ×

«»

4. b

ii in solid state, nearest neighbour m

olecules cannot exchange places/have fixed positions/are closer to each other/have regular pattern/have stronger forces of attraction

OW

TTE

Accept converse argum

ent for liquids 1 m

ax

in liquid, bonds between m

olecules can be broken and re-form

– 11 –N

17/4/PHYSI/SP2/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

Question

Answers

Notes

Total 5.

a 2

2m

vM

mG

rr

=

3

leading to 2

32

4r

TG

M π=

5320s

T=

«»

Alternative 2

EG

mv

r=

«»

−

××

××

=11

24

36.67

106.0

66000

101

OR

–1

7800m

s«

»

distance3

22

660010

mr

==

××

ππ

«»

or 7

4.1510

m×

«»

74.15

105300

s7800

dT

v×

==

=«

»«

»

Accept use of ω

instead of v

(continued…)

– 12 –N

17/4/PHYSI/SP2/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M


Question

Answers

Notes

Total 5.

b i

336

max

2.9010

2.9010

10.110

Tλ

−−−

××

==

×«

»

2

287K

14C °

=»

»«

«or

Aw

ard [0] for any use of wavelength from

S

un

Do not accept 287

°C

5. b

ii w

avelength of radiation from the Sun is shorter than that em

itted from Earth

«and is not absorbed by the atmosphere»

3 infrared radiation em

itted from Earth is absorbed by greenhouse gases in the

atmosphere

this radiation is re-emitted in all directions «including back to Earth»

5. c

peer review

1 max

international collaboration

full details of experiments published so that experim

ents can repeated

28EP01



1 hour

Wednesday 1 November 2017 (morning)Candidate session number



• Write your session number in the boxes above.• Do not open this examination paper until instructed to do so.• Answers must be written within the answer boxes provided.• A calculator is required for this paper.• A clean copy of the physics data booklet is required for this paper.• The maximum mark for this examination paper is [35 marks].

Section A QuestionsAnswer all questions. 1 – 3

Section B QuestionsAnswer all of the questions from one of the options.

Option A — Relativity 4 – 6

Option B — Engineering physics 7 – 8

Option C — Imaging 9 – 10

Option D — Astrophysics 11 – 13

8817 –6506


28EP02

– 2 –

Section A

Answer all questions. Answers must be written within the answer boxes provided.

1. In an experiment, data were collected on the variation of specific heat capacity of water with temperature. The graph of the plotted data is shown.

specific heat capacity / kJ kg–1 K–1

4.225

4.220

4.215

4.210

4.205

4.200

4.195

4.190

4.185

4.1804.180

4.185

4.190

4.195

4.200

4.205

4.210

4.215

4.220

4.225

40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 temperature / C

(a) Draw the line of best-fit for the data. [1]



28EP03

– 3 –

Turn over


(b) (i) Determine the gradient of the line at a temperature of 80 C. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) State the unit for the quantity represented by the gradient in your answer to (b)(i). [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) The uncertainty in the values for specific heat capacity is 5%. Water of mass (100 2) g is heated from (75.0 0.5) C to (85.0 0.5) C.

(i) Calculate the energy required to raise the temperature of the water from 75 C to 85 C. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Using an appropriate error calculation, justify the number of significant figures that should be used for your answer to (c)(i). [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


28EP04

– 4 –

2. An electrical circuit is used during an experiment to measure the current I in a variable resistor of resistance R. The emf of the cell is e and the cell has an internal resistance r.

e r

R

I

A graph shows the variation of 1I

with R.

1I

R

(a) Show that the gradient of the graph is equal to 1e

. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) State the value of the intercept on the R axis. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


28EP05

– 5 –

Turn over

3. A student is running an experiment to determine the acceleration of free-fall g. She drops a small metal ball from a given height and measures the time t taken for it to fall using an electronic timer. She repeats the same experiment several times.

(a) Suggest a reason for repeating the experiment in the same conditions. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) With the collected data she determines the value of g to be (10.4 0.7) m s–2. Researching scientific literature about the location of her experiment she finds the value of g to be (9.807 0.006) m s–2. State, with a reason, whether her experiment is accurate. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


28EP06

– 6 –

Section B

Answer all of the questions from one of the options. Answers must be written within the answer boxes provided.

Option A — Relativity

4. Outline the conclusion from Maxwell’s work on electromagnetism that led to one of the postulates of special relativity. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. Two rockets, A and B, are moving towards each other on the same path. From the frame of reference of the Earth, an observer measures the speed of A to be 0.6c and the speed of B to be 0.4c. According to the observer on Earth, the distance between A and B is 6.0 108 m.

rocket A, 0.6c

6.0 108 m

observer on Earth

rocket B, 0.4c

(a) Define frame of reference. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



28EP07

– 7 –

Turn over


(b) Calculate, according to the observer on Earth, the time taken for A and B to meet. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) Identify the terms in the formula.

21

u vu uvc

−′ =−

[1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(d) Determine, according to an observer in A, the velocity of B. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Option A continues on page 9)


28EP08

– 8 –




28EP09

– 9 –

Turn over

(Option A, question 5 continued from page 7)

(e) (i) Determine, according to an observer in A, the time taken for B to meet A. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Deduce, without further calculation, how the time taken for A to meet B, according to an observer in B, compares with the time taken for the same event according to an observer in A. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



28EP10

– 10 –


6. A train is passing through a tunnel of proper length 80 m. The proper length of the train is 100 m. According to an observer at rest relative to the tunnel, when the front of the train coincides with one end of the tunnel, the rear of the train coincides with the other end of the tunnel.

(a) Explain what is meant by proper length. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Draw a spacetime diagram for this situation according to an observer at rest relative to the tunnel. [3]

(c) Calculate the velocity of the train, according to an observer at rest relative to the tunnel, at which the train fits the tunnel. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



28EP11

– 11 –

Turn over


(d) For an observer on the train, it is the tunnel that is moving and therefore will appear length contracted. This seems to contradict the observation made by the observer at rest to the tunnel, creating a paradox. Explain how this paradox is resolved. You may refer to your spacetime diagram in (b). [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

End of Option A


28EP12

– 12 –

Option B — Engineering physics

7. A hoop of mass m, radius r and moment of inertia mr 2 rests on a rough plane inclined at an angle to the horizontal. It is released so that the hoop gains linear and angular acceleration by rolling, without slipping, down the plane.

hoop

(a) On the diagram, draw and label the forces acting on the hoop. [2]

(b) Show that the linear acceleration a of the hoop is given by the equation shown.

sin 2

ga q×=

[4]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



28EP13

– 13 –

Turn over


(c) Calculate the acceleration of the hoop when = 20. Assume that the hoop continues to roll without slipping. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(d) State the relationship between the force of friction and the angle of the incline. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(e) The angle of the incline is slowly increased from zero. Determine the angle, in terms of the coefficient of friction, at which the hoop will begin to slip. [3]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



28EP14

– 14 –


8. A monatomic ideal gas is confined to a cylinder with volume 2.0 10–3 m3. The initial pressure of the gas is 100 kPa. The gas undergoes a three-step cycle. First, the gas pressure increases by a factor of five under constant volume. Then, the gas expands adiabatically to its initial pressure. Finally it is compressed at constant pressure to its initial volume.

(a) Show that the volume of the gas at the end of the adiabatic expansion is approximately 5.3 10–3 m3. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Using the axes, sketch the three-step cycle. [2]

p / kPa

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

00 1 2 3 4 5 6

0

100

200

300

400

500

600

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 V / 10–3 m3



28EP15

– 15 –

Turn over


(c) The initial temperature of the gas is 290 K. Calculate the temperature of the gas at the start of the adiabatic expansion. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(d) Using your sketched graph in (b), identify the feature that shows that net work is done by the gas in this three-step cycle. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

End of Option B


28EP16

– 16 –

Option C — Imaging

9. A magnifying glass is constructed from a thin converging lens.

(a) (i) Sketch a ray diagram to show how the magnifying glass produces an upright image. [2]

f f

thin converging lens

(ii) State the maximum possible distance from an object to the lens in order for the lens to produce an upright image. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



28EP17

– 17 –

Turn over


(b) A converging lens can also be used to produce an image of a distant object. The base of the object is positioned on the principal axis of the lens at a distance of 10.0 m from the centre of the lens. The lens has a focal length of 2.0 m.

(i) Determine the position of the image. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) State three characteristics of the image. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



28EP18

– 18 –


(c) The object is replaced with an L shape that is positioned 0.30 m vertically above the principal axis as shown. A screen is used to form a focused image of part of the L shape. Two points P and Q on the base of the L shape and R on its top, are indicated on the diagram. Point Q is 10.0 m away from the same lens as used in part (b).

0.30 m

10.0 m

f f

not to scale

(i) On the diagram, draw two rays to locate the point Q′ on the image that corresponds to point Q on the L shape. [2]

(ii) Calculate the vertical distance of point Q′ from the principal axis. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) A screen is positioned to form a focused image of point Q. State the direction, relative to Q, in which the screen needs to be moved to form a focused imaged of point R. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



28EP19

– 19 –

Turn over


(iv) The screen is now correctly positioned to form a focused image of point R. However, the top of the L shape looks distorted. Identify and explain the reason for this distortion. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



28EP20

– 20 –


10. An astronomical reflecting telescope is being used to observe the night sky.

The diagram shows an incomplete reflecting telescope.

parabolic reflector

principal focus

eyepiece

(a) Complete the diagram, with a Newtonian mounting, continuing the two rays to show how they pass through the eyepiece. [3]

(b) When the Earth-Moon distance is 363 300 km, the Moon is observed using the telescope. The mean radius of the Moon is 1737 km. Determine the focal length of the mirror used in this telescope when the diameter of the Moon’s image formed by the main mirror is 1.20 cm. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) The final image of the Moon is observed through the eyepiece. The focal length of the eyepiece is 5.0 cm. Calculate the magnification of the telescope. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



28EP21

– 21 –

Turn over


(d) The Hubble Space reflecting telescope has a Cassegrain mounting. Outline the main optical difference between a Cassegrain mounting and a Newtonian mounting. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

End of Option C


28EP22

– 22 –

Option D — Astrophysics

11. Two of the brightest objects in the night sky are the planet Jupiter and the star Vega. The light observed from Jupiter has a similar brightness to that received from Vega.

(a) (i) Identify the mechanism leading stars to produce the light they emit. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Outline why the light detected from Jupiter and Vega have a similar brightness, according to an observer on Earth. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



28EP23

– 23 –

Turn over


(b) Vega is found in the constellation Lyra. The stellar parallax angle of Vega is about 0.13 arc sec.

(i) Outline what is meant by a constellation. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Outline how the stellar parallax angle is measured. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) Show that the distance to Vega from Earth is about 25 ly. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



28EP24

– 24 –


12. Sirius is a binary star. It is composed of two stars, Sirius A and Sirius B. Sirius A is a main sequence star.

(a) State what is meant by a binary star. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The peak spectral line of Sirius B has a measured wavelength of 115 nm. Show that the surface temperature of Sirius B is about 25 000 K. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) The mass of Sirius B is about the same mass as the Sun. The luminosity of Sirius B is 2.5 % of the luminosity of the Sun. Show, with a calculation, that Sirius B is not a main sequence star. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



28EP25

– 25 –

Turn over


(d) The Sun’s surface temperature is about 5800 K.

(i) Determine the radius of Sirius B. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Identify the star type of Sirius B. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



28EP26

– 26 –


(e) The image shows a Hertzsprung–Russell (HR) diagram.

luminosity

1 000 000

10 000

10 000 6000 300025 000

100

L

L

L

L

1100

L

110 000

L

Sun

temperature / K

The mass of Sirius A is twice the mass of the Sun. Using the Hertzsprung–Russell (HR) diagram,

(i) draw the approximate positions of Sirius A, labelled A and Sirius B, labelled B. [1]

(ii) sketch the expected evolutionary path for Sirius A. [1]



28EP27

– 27 –

Turn over


13. The collision of two galaxies is being studied. The wavelength of a particular spectral line from the galaxy measured from Earth is 116.04 nm. The spectral line when measured from a source on Earth is 115.00 nm.

(a) Outline one reason for the difference in wavelength. [1]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Determine the velocity of the galaxy relative to Earth. [2]

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

End of Option D

28EP28



N17/4/PH

YSI/SP3/ENG

/TZ0/XX/M

19 pages

Markschem

e

Novem

ber 2017

Physics

Standard level

Paper 3

–2 –

N17/4/PH

YSI/SP3/ENG

/TZ0/XX/M

This markschem



ithout the authorization of the IB Global C

entre, C

ardiff.

– 3 –N

17/4/PHYSI/SP3/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

Section A

Question

Answers

Notes

Total 1.

a single sm

ooth curve passing through all data points

1

1. b

i tangent draw

n at 80 °C

3

gradient values separated by minim

um of 20 °C

Do not accept tangent unless “ruler” straight.

Tangent line must be touching the curve draw

n for MP

1 to be aw

arded. 4

9.010

−×

«1

2kJkg

K−

−»

A

ccept values between

47.0

10−

× and

410

10−

×.

Accept w

orking in J, giving 0.7 to 1.0

1. b

ii 1

2kJkg

K−

−

A

ccept J instead of kJ

Accept °C

–2 instead of K–2

Accept °C

–1 K–1 instead of K

–2

Accept C

for °C

1

1. c

i 0.1

4.19810

4.198kJ

××

=«

»«

» or 4198

J«»

A

ccept values between 4.19 and 4.21

1

1. c

ii percentage uncertainty in

10%T=

∆

A

llow fractional uncertainties in M

P1 and MP2

3

2%5%

10%17%

++

=«

»

absolute uncertainty0.17

4.1980.7

kJ=

×=

«»

«»

therefore 2 sig figs O

R

absolute uncertainty to more than 1 sig fig and consistent

final answer

– 4 –N

17/4/PHYSI/SP3/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

Question

Answers

Notes

Total

2. a

Rr

ε=

+«

»I

IN

o mark for stating data booklet equation

2

1R

rε

ε=

+I

identifies equation with

ym

c=

+x

1hence m

ε=

«»

Do not accept w

orking where r is ignored or ε = IR

is used

OW

TTE

2. b

−«

»r

A

llow answ

er in words

1

3. a

«to reduce» random errors

O

WTTE

Do not accept just “to find an average” or just “reduce error”

Ignore any mention to accuracy

1 max

to reduce absolute uncertainty

to improve precision

3. b

as the literature value is within the range

9.711.1

−«

»

O

WTTE

2 hence it is accurate

M

P2 m

ust be correctly justified

– 5 –N

17/4/PHYSI/SP3/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

Section B

Option A —

Relativity

Question

Answers

Notes

Total

4. light is an EM

wave

2

speed of light is independent of the source/observer

5. a

a co-ordinate system in w

hich measurem

ents «of distance and time»

can be made

Ignore any m

ention to inertial reference frame.

1

5. b

closing speedc

=

2

2 «s»

5. c

uand v are velocities w

ith respect to the same fram

e ofreference/Earth A

ND

u′ the relative velocity

Accept 0.4c and 0.6c for u and v

1

5. d

0.40.6

10.24

−−

+

2 0.81c

−«

»

5. e

i 1.25

γ=

2 so the tim

e is 1.6

st=

«»

5. e

ii gam

ma is sm

aller for B

2 so tim

e is greater than for A

– 6 –N

17/4/PHYSI/SP3/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

Question

Answers

Notes

Total

6. a

the length of an object in its rest frame

OR

the length of an object m

easured when at rest relative to the observer

1

6. b

world lines for front and back of tunnel parallel to ct axis

ct

ct'

x

3

world lines for front and back of train

which are parallel to ct ′axis

6. c

realizes that gamm

a=

1.25

2 0.6c

(continued…)

– 7 –N

17/4/PHYSI/SP3/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M


Question

Answers

Notes

Total

6. d

ALTER

NA

TIVE 1 ct

ct'

x'

x

t'

2

indicates the two sim

ultaneous events for t frame

marks on the diagram

the different times «for both spacetim

e points» on the ct ′axis «show

n as t ′

∆ on each diagram

»

ALTER

NA

TIVE 2: (no diagram reference)

the two events occur at different points in space

statement that the tw

o events are not simultaneous in the t ′fram

e

– 8 –N

17/4/PHYSI/SP3/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

Option B —

Engineering physics

Question

Answers

Notes

Total

7. a

weight, norm

al reaction and friction in correct direction

Labelled on diagram.

2

correct points of application for at least two correct forces

N

W

Ff

hoop

Allow

different wording and sym

bols

Ignore relative lengths

(continued…)

– 9 –N

17/4/PHYSI/SP3/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M


Question

Answers

Notes

Total

7. b

ALTER

NA

TIVE 1 C

an be in any order

4

fsin

ma

mg

Fθ

=−

fF

rα=

×IO

R

fm

rF

α=

No m

ark for re-writing given answ

er

Accept answ

ers using the parallel axis theorem

(with

22

)m

r=

I only if clear and explicit m

ention that the only torque is from

the weight

Answ

er given look for correct working

arα=

sin

2sin

am

am

gm

ra

gr

θ=

−→

=θ

ALTER

NA

TIVE 2

22

11

22

mgh

mv

ω=

+I

For alternative 2, MP

3 and MP

4 can only be aw

arded if the previous marking points are

present

substituting vr

ω=

giving vgh

=«

»

correct use of a kinematic equation

use of trigonometry to relate displacem

ent and heightsin

sh

θ=

«»

7. c

21.68

ms−

«»

1

(c ontinued…)

– 10 –N

17/4/PHYSI/SP3/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M


Question

Answers

Notes

Total

7. d

ALTER

NA

TIVE 1

2

cosN

mg

θ=

fcos

Fm

gµ

θ≤

ALTER

NA

TIVE 2

fF

ma

=«from

7(b)»

so f

sin2

mg

Fθ

=

7. e

fcos

Fm

gµ

θ=

3

sinsin

cos2

mg

mg

mg

θθ

µθ

=−

OR

sincos

2m

gm

gθ

µθ

=

algebraic manipulation to reach tan

2θ

µ=

– 11 –N

17/4/PHYSI/SP3/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

Question

Answers

Notes

Total

8. a

533

500000(2

10)

−×

×=

53

100000V×

2 3

35.25

10m

V−

=×

«»

8. b

correct vertical and horizontal lines

Allow

tolerance ±1 square for A, B

and C

2

curve between B and C

Allow

EC

F for MP

2

Points do not need to be labelled for m

arking points to be awarded

V / 10–3 m

3

01

23

45

60

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

p / kpa

BAC

8. c

use of PVnR

T=

OR

use of constant

PT=

2 5

2901450

KT=

×=

«»

«»

(c ontinued…)

– 12 –N

17/4/PHYSI/SP3/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M


Question

Answers

Notes

Total

8. d

area enclosed

2 max

work is done by the gas during expansion

OR

w

ork is done on the gas during compression

the area under the expansion is greater than the area under the compression

– 13 –N

17/4/PHYSI/SP3/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M

Option C —

Imaging

Question

Answers

Notes

Total 9.

a i

with object placed betw

een lens and focus

Backw

ards extrapolation of refracted rays can be dashes or solid lines

Do not penalize extrapolated rays w

hich would m

eet beyond the edge of page

Image need not be show

n

2

two rays correctly draw

n

9. a

ii «just less than» the focal length or f

1

9. b

i 1

11

102

v+

=

2

2.5m

v=

«»

9. b

ii real, sm

aller, inverted

All three required —

OW

TTE

1 (continued…

)

– 14 –N

17/4/PHYSI/SP3/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M


Question

Answers

Notes

Total

9. c

i tw

o correct rays coming from

Q

A

llow any tw

o of the three conventional rays.

2

locating Q′ below

the main axis A

ND

beyond f to the right of lens A

ND

at intercept of rays

Q

RP0.30 m

10.0 m

ff

Q’

9. c

ii hh

−=′

′ xxO

R

2.5 or 100.3

m×

«»

2

«–» 0.075 «m»

9. c

iii tow

ards Q

A

ccept move to the left

1

9. c

iv spherical aberration

2

top of the shape «R» is far from

axis so no paraxial rays

For MP

2 accept rays far from the centre converge at different

points

– 18 –N

17/4/PHYSI/SP3/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M


Question

Answers

Notes

Total 12.

d i

Siriusu

B

Sn

0.025LL

=

2

SiriusSun

45800

0.0250.0085

25000r

r

=

=

×

«»

12. d

ii w

hite dwarf

1

12. e

i Sirius A on the m

ain sequence above and to the left of the Sun A

ND

Sirius B on white dw

arf area as shown

B

oth positions must be labelled

Allow

the position anywhere w

ithin the limits show

n.

1000

000

10000

10000

60003000

25000

100

luminosity

temperature / K

B

A

1

(continued…)

– 19 –N

17/4/PHYSI/SP3/EN

G/TZ0/XX/M


Question

Answers

Notes

Total 12.

e ii

arrow goes up and right and then loops to w

hite dwarf

area

1000

000

10000

10000

60003000

25000

100

luminosity

temperature / K

A1

13. a

galaxies are moving aw

ay O

R

space «between galaxies» is expanding

Do not accept just red-shift

1

13. b

1.0«

4»

115vc

∆λ=

=λ

Accept 2.7

×10

6 «m s

–1»

Aw

ard [0] if 116 is used for λ2

0.009c

physics standard level paper 1 - smiletutor · 2020-03-18 · physics standard level paper 1...

Documents